Rohde & Schwarz RTP044 User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Test Equipment
  5. RTP044
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz RTP044 User Manual

High-performance oscilloscope
Hide thumbs Also See for RTP044:
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
RTP
High-Performance Oscilloscope
User Manual
(=UñÂ2)
1337995202
Version 12

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RTP044 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz RTP044

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz RTP044

  • Page 1 ® R&S High-Performance Oscilloscope User Manual (=UñÂ2) 1337995202 Version 12...
  • Page 2 ® This manual describes the following R&S RTP models with firmware version 5.10: ● ® R&S RTP044 (1320.5007K04) ● ® R&S RTP064 (1320.5007K06) ● ® R&S RTP084 (1320.5007K08) ● ® R&S RTP134 (1320.5007K13) ● ® R&S RTP164 (1320.5007K16) © 2021 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr.

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............27 Safety instructions......................27 Labels on the product....................32 Warning messages in the documentation..............32 Korea certification class A..................33 2 Preface....................34 Key Features........................34 Documentation overview....................34 2.2.1 Manuals and instrument help..................34 2.2.2 Data sheet and brochure....................36 2.2.3 Release notes, open source acknowledgment.............
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S 3.3.1 Means of manual interaction..................62 3.3.2 Touchscreen display......................62 3.3.3 App cockpit........................68 3.3.4 Working with waveforms....................69 3.3.5 Rohde & Schwarz smartgrid..................71 3.3.6 Toolbar.......................... 73 3.3.7 Displaying results......................80 3.3.8 Using dialog boxes......................81 3.3.9 Entering data.........................83 3.3.10 Instrument information and notifications...............
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S 4.3.11 Protocol appearance settings..................111 Display settings......................112 4.4.1 Persistence settings....................112 4.4.2 Signal settings......................113 4.4.3 Backlight settings......................114 4.4.4 Monitors settings......................115 4.4.5 Performance settings....................116 Frontpanel settings....................116 4.5.1 Hardkeys: function assignment................... 116 4.5.2 Knobs.......................... 118 4.5.3 Touchscreen........................
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S 5.2.1 Setup settings......................141 5.2.2 Zoom settings......................143 5.2.3 Roll settings.........................143 Horizontal accuracy....................144 5.3.1 Skew........................... 144 5.3.2 Reference clock (OCXO).................... 146 5.3.3 AUX OUT........................147 Acquire settings......................147 5.4.1 Setup settings......................147 5.4.2 Mode settings......................150 5.4.3 Segmented settings....................153 5.4.4 High definition mode....................
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S 5.7.2 ZVC voltage settings....................198 5.7.3 ZVC current settings....................199 Differential signals....................202 5.8.1 Settings of differential signals..................203 5.8.2 Vertical setup of differential signals................205 5.8.3 Deembedding of differential signals................206 5.8.4 Analysis of differential signals..................206 Setting up the waveform..................
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S 6.3.10 Setup & Hold trigger....................227 6.3.11 State..........................229 6.3.12 Pattern.........................230 6.3.13 Serial pattern.......................232 6.3.14 TV/Video trigger......................232 6.3.15 Line trigger........................237 6.3.16 Triggering on serial buses................... 237 6.3.17 Triggering on parallel buses and digital channels............237 Mode / Holdoff......................238 Conditioning......................
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S Mathematics......................289 7.3.1 Displaying math waveforms..................290 7.3.2 Math setup - general settings..................291 7.3.3 Operator editor......................292 7.3.4 Equation........................294 7.3.5 Filters.......................... 302 7.3.6 Math scale settings..................... 304 7.3.7 Math arithmetic......................307 History........................309 7.4.1 About history....................... 309 7.4.2 History setup.......................
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S Quick measurements....................400 8.3.1 Starting the quick measurement................. 400 8.3.2 Configuring the quick measurement................400 9 Spectrum analysis................402 FFT analysis......................402 9.1.1 Fundamentals of FFT analysis..................402 9.1.2 Configuring spectrum waveforms................406 9.1.3 FFT configuration settings...................410 Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37)............. 419 9.2.1 Spectrogram display....................
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S 11 Search functions................448 11.1 Overview: search definition and results..............448 11.1.1 Search definition......................448 11.1.2 Search results......................449 11.2 Search setup......................449 11.2.1 Search criteria......................450 11.2.2 Search parameters......................451 11.2.3 Frequency marker search................... 462 11.2.4 Configuring the search setup..................462 11.3 Search gate........................464 11.3.1...
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S 12.4 Reports........................507 12.4.1 Report settings......................507 12.5 File selection dialog....................509 13 Protocol analysis................511 13.1 Basics of protocol analysis..................511 13.1.1 Setup - general settings....................512 13.1.2 Autoset for protocols....................513 13.1.3 Display........................514 13.1.4 Content and format of the PTT file................515 13.1.5 Shortcuts........................
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S 13.5.4 CAN and CAN FD decode results................571 13.5.5 Search on decoded CAN or CAN FD data..............572 13.5.6 Symbolic trigger, decode and search................577 13.6 LIN (option R&S RTP-K3)..................582 13.6.1 The LIN protocol......................582 13.6.2 LIN configuration......................583 13.6.3 LIN trigger........................
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S 13.10.5 Search on decoded 100BASE-T1 data............... 655 13.11 Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58)............660 13.11.1 1000BASE-T1 basics....................660 13.11.2 1000BASE-T1 configuration..................661 13.11.3 1000BASE-T1 trigger....................664 13.11.4 1000BASE-T1 decode results..................670 13.11.5 Search on decoded 1000BASE-T1 data..............671 13.12 RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40)..................678 13.12.1 The RFFE protocol......................678...
  • Page 15 ® Contents R&S 13.16 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52)..................774 13.16.1 The 8b/10b code......................774 13.16.2 8b/10b configuration....................775 13.16.3 8b/10b trigger......................780 13.16.4 8b/10b decode results....................783 13.16.5 Search on decoded 8b/10b data................. 784 13.17 MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55)..................787 13.17.1 The MDIO protocol......................788 13.17.2 MDIO configuration.....................
  • Page 16 ® Contents R&S 13.21.3 SpaceWire trigger....................... 866 13.21.4 SpaceWire decode results..................869 13.21.5 Search on decoded SpaceWire data................870 13.22 PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73)................873 13.22.1 The PCIe protocol....................... 873 13.22.2 PCIe configuration.......................876 13.22.3 PCIe digital signal processing (DSP) settings.............879 13.22.4 PCIe trigger.........................
  • Page 17 ® Contents R&S 15 Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6)........954 15.1 Setup of the waveform generator................954 15.1.1 General settings......................955 15.1.2 Function generator...................... 956 15.1.3 Modulation........................961 15.1.4 Sweep......................... 967 15.1.5 Arbitrary........................968 15.2 Setup of the pattern generator.................973 15.2.1 Content and format of the pattern generator files............974 15.2.2 Pattern generator settings...................975 15.3...
  • Page 18 ® Contents R&S 17 I/Q software interface (Option R&S RTP-K11)....... 1003 17.1 I/Q mode........................1003 17.2 I/Q sampling setup....................1003 17.3 I/Q data output......................1009 17.4 Deembedding in I/Q mode..................1010 18 Jitter analysis and clock data recovery......... 1012 18.1 Jitter measurements (Option R&S RTP-K12)............1013 18.1.1 Jitter measurements....................1013 18.1.2...
  • Page 19 ® Contents R&S 19.3.1 Responses of the component cascade..............1071 19.3.2 Responses of the measurement setup..............1071 19.4 Proven probe, proven cable...................1072 19.4.1 Characterization of proven probes and cables............1072 19.4.2 Deembedding with proven probe or proven cable............ 1076 20 Compliance tests................1078 20.1 USB compliance test....................
  • Page 20 ® Contents R&S 21.3.1 Settings on the R&S RTP..................1097 21.3.2 Web browser......................1097 21.4 Remote Desktop connection..................1102 21.5 Remote control......................1104 21.5.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols..............1105 21.5.2 Remote settings......................1106 21.5.3 Starting and stopping remote control.................1108 21.5.4 Remote control - status reporting system..............1109 22 Remote control commands.............
  • Page 21 ® Contents R&S 22.7.6 Maintenance......................1184 22.8 Acquisition and setup.....................1186 22.8.1 Starting and stopping acquisition................1187 22.8.2 Time base........................1188 22.8.3 Acquisition......................... 1194 22.8.4 Fast segmentation..................... 1198 22.8.5 Vertical........................1199 22.8.6 Waveform data......................1204 22.8.7 Probes........................1206 22.8.8 R&S RT-ZVC probe....................1230 22.8.9 Differential signals..................... 1243 22.8.10 Digital filter........................
  • Page 22 ® Contents R&S 22.9.17 Holdoff........................1303 22.9.18 Conditioning......................1307 22.9.19 Trigger sequence...................... 1309 22.9.20 Trigger control......................1313 22.9.21 Actions on trigger...................... 1314 22.9.22 Zone trigger (option R&S RTP-K19)................1316 22.9.23 External trigger input....................1317 22.9.24 Acquisition info......................1317 22.10 Waveform analysis....................1318 22.10.1 Zoom.........................
  • Page 23 ® Contents R&S 22.13 Spectrum analysis....................1442 22.13.1 Basic FFT........................1442 22.13.2 Waveform data......................1455 22.13.3 Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37)..............1456 22.14 Mask testing......................1459 22.14.1 Mask test definition....................1459 22.14.2 Mask definition: user mask..................1463 22.14.3 Mask definition: waveform mask................1469 22.14.4 Event actions......................1471 22.14.5...
  • Page 24 ® Contents R&S 22.16.5 Waveform data export to file..................1527 22.16.6 Waveform histogram export to file................1535 22.16.7 Results........................1536 22.16.8 Long term measurement results and measurement histogram export to file.... 1537 22.16.9 Screenshots......................1539 22.16.10 Reports........................1543 22.16.11 Autonaming....................... 1544 22.16.12 CSV export........................1546 22.16.13 External application....................1546...
  • Page 25 ® Contents R&S 22.17.24 DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93)................2169 22.18 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1)............. 2196 22.18.1 Digital channels......................2197 22.18.2 Parallel bus configuration..................2200 22.18.3 Digital resolution......................2207 22.18.4 Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses..........2208 22.18.5 MSO data........................2217 22.19 Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6)............
  • Page 26 ® Contents R&S 22.25.2 STATus:QUEStionable registers................2306 22.26 Remote trace......................2311 22.26.1 Standard commands....................2311 22.26.2 Diagnostic remote trace commands................2314 22.27 Deprecated commands...................2314 22.27.1 Base instrument......................2315 22.27.2 Options........................2316 23 Maintenance and support..............2317 23.1 Cleaning........................2317 23.2 Power cables for R&S RTP..................2317 23.3 Contacting customer support................2318 23.4...

  • Page 27: Safety And Regulatory Information

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you to use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the Chapter 1.1, "Safety instructions", on page 27. Intended use The R&S RTP oscilloscope is designed for measurements on circuits that are only indi- rectly connected to the mains or not connected at all.
  • Page 28 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions In these safety instructions, the term "product" covers instruments (oscilloscopes), probes and their accessories. Lifting and carrying the instrument Check the data sheet for the maximum weight of the instrument. A single person can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical condi- tion.
  • Page 29 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions ment such as household appliances and similar loads. Be aware that electrically pow- ered products have risks, such as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Take the following measures for your safety: ●...
  • Page 30 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions ● When working with high voltages and current probes, observe the additional oper- ating conditions specified in this safety instructions. ● The probe pins are extremely pointed and can easily penetrate clothes and the skin.
  • Page 31 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions Measurement categories IEC 61010-2-030 defines measurement categories that rate instruments on their ability to resist short transient overvoltages that occur in addition to the working voltage. Use the measurement setup only in electrical environments for which they are rated. ●...

  • Page 32: Labels On The Product

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Warning messages in the documentation Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This protects you against electric shock should an electric problem occur.

  • Page 33: Korea Certification Class A

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Korea certification class A 1.4 Korea certification class A 이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 34: Preface

    ® Preface R&S Documentation overview 2 Preface 2.1 Key Features The R&S RTP high-performance oscilloscopes combine superior signal integrity with fastest acquisition rate. It combines multiple instrument capabilities for time-correlated debugging in one box. Outstanding key features are: Real-time signal integrity ●...
  • Page 35 ® Preface R&S Documentation overview Getting started manual Introduces the R&S RTP and describes how to set up and start working with the instru- ment, and describes basic operations. A printed English version is included in the delivery. Editions in other languages are available on the product website. Instrument help The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the firm- ware basic functionality and applications.

  • Page 36: Data Sheet And Brochure

    ® Preface R&S Options Described in this Document Instrument security procedures manual Deals with security issues when working with the R&S RTP in secure areas. Service Manual Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace- ment, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
  • Page 37 ® Preface R&S Options Described in this Document Type Designation Order No. R&S RTP-K1 I²C and SPI serial triggering and decoding 1337.8604.02 R&S RTP-K2 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 serial triggering and 1337.8610.02 decoding R&S RTP-K3 CAN and LIN serial triggering and decoding 1337.8627.02 R&S RTP-K6 MIL-STD-1553 serial triggering and decoding 1800.6654.02...

  • Page 38: Conventions Used In The Documentation

    ® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation Type Designation Order No. R&S RTP-K91 DDR3/DDR3L/LPDDR3 debug & compliance test. Decode 1337.8840.02 and debug is described in this user manual. The compli- ance test is described in a separate manual. R&S RTP-K93 DDR4/LPDDR4 debug &...
  • Page 39 ® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a key- board.

  • Page 40: Getting Started

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the R&S RTP Getting Started manual for R&S RTP instruments. ● Preparing for use.....................40 ● Instrument tour......................47 ● Operating the instrument..................61 3.1 Preparing for use Here, you can find basic information about setting up the instrument for the first time or...

  • Page 41: Setting Up The Product

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use – Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings ● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi- ated disturbances.

  • Page 42: Considerations For Test Setup

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity. ● Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators or other products.

  • Page 43: Connecting To Power

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use ● Always terminate open cable ends. ● Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations. Signal input and output levels Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet. Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to avoid damage to the product and connected devices.

  • Page 44: Switching On Or Off

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3.1.7 Switching on or off The instrument is switched on or off with the power switch and the [Power] key. The [Power] key is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel. The power switch is located at the rear panel of the instrument.

  • Page 45: Connecting External Devices

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 2. Disconnect the product from the power source. 3.1.8 Connecting external devices The following interfaces for external devices are provided: ● USB connectors at the front and rear panel of the instrument ● Monitor connectors DVI-D and DisplayPort at the rear panel of the instrument ●...
  • Page 46 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Connecting a keyboard The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan- guage is English – US. To configure the keyboard properties: 1. Tap the "Find" icon (magnifier) on the Windows taskbar. 2.

  • Page 47: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2 Instrument tour This chapter describes the front and rear panels of the instrument including all function keys and connectors. 3.2.1 Front panel This section provides an overview of the R&S RTP front panel and explains the various connectors and the option slots at the front.
  • Page 48 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 11 = USB connectors 12 = Connectors for probe compensation and grounding 13 = [Power] key The keys and controls are described in Chapter 3.2.3, "Keys and controls", on page 52. 3.2.1.1 Connectors Channel inputs and external trigger input The R&S RTP has four channel inputs to connect the input signals, and an external trigger input to control the measurement by an external signal.

  • Page 49: Rear Panel

    ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Mixed signal option R&S RTP-B1 / digital extension port R&S RTP-B1E The mixed signal option R&S RTP-B1 provides logic analizer functionality and 16 digi- tal channels. It also can connect the R&S RT-ZVC multi-channel power probe. The connectors are used to connect two logical probes with 8 digital channels each (D0 to D7 and D8 to D15), or two flat interface cables of R&S RT-ZVC.
  • Page 50 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Figure 3-2: Rear panel of R&S RTP 1 = AC power supply connector and main power switch 2 = USB device connector, type B 3 = USB connectors, type A 4 = LAN connector 5 = DVI-D connector for external monitor 6 = DisplayPort connector 7 = GPIB connector...
  • Page 51 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour See also: Chapter 3.1.6, "Connecting to power", on page 43. USB Device USB 3.0 interface of type B (device USB), to be used for remote control of the instru- ment. Four USB type A connectors. Two connectors comply with standard USB 3.1 gen 1, and the other two with standard USB 2.0.

  • Page 52: Keys And Controls

    ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Ref In, Ref Out BNC connectors for input of a reference signal, and for output of the OCXO reference signal. The input frequency ranges from 1 MHz to 20 MHz in 1 MHz steps. The input impe- dance is 50 Ω.
  • Page 53 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Save Recall] Opens and closes the "File" dialog box, where you can: ● Save instrument settings (user settings) ● Load instrument settings which were saved before ● Save waveform data and measurement results ● Define a naming pattern for autonaming of files [Setup] Opens and closes the "Setup"...
  • Page 54 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2.3.3 Horizontal controls The keys and rotary knobs in the Horizontal functional block adjust the acquisition set- tings and horizontal parameters. These settings are effective for all channel wave- forms. [Res Rec Len], [Horizontal] Open and close the "Setup"...
  • Page 55 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour You can select if the knob changes the position or the reference point in "File" menu > "Frontpanel Setup" > "Knobs". To set the value to zero, press the knob. The current value is shown in the input box in the lower right corner of the screen. "Horizontal position"...
  • Page 56 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour The vertical rotary knobs are focused on the selected waveform. They are illuminated in the color of the selected waveform. [Logic] Opens the dialog box for configuration of parallel buses and digital channels. The key lights up if you enable at least one parallel bus.
  • Page 57 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Trigger] Opens and closes the "Trigger" dialog box, where you can: ● Select a trigger type and configure it. ● Set general trigger parameters and control the acquisition run. ● Qualify the trigger event with logic patterns. ●...
  • Page 58 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Single] Starts a defined number of acquisitions. A green light indicates a running acquisition. A red light shows that acquisition is stopped. Press the key again to stop running acquisi- tions. To set the number of acquisitions, press the [Trigger] key, select the "Ctrl/Action" tab, and set "Average count (N-single count)".
  • Page 59 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour App Cockpit Opens the "App Cockpit" dialog box, where you can start an application or analysis function directly, without knowing its position in the menu or toolbar. [Zoom] Displays a zoom diagram for the active diagram. The key is illuminated if at least one zoom is active.
  • Page 60 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Navigation] rotary knob The [Navigation] knob has various functions: ● In numeric entry fields: turn to increase or decrease the value. ● In tables: press to activate the edit mode, turn clockwise to increase the value or turn counterclockwise to decrease it, and press to enter the value and move to the next cell.

  • Page 61: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Checkmark [☑] The checkmark key [☑] has different functions depending on the focus: ● In usual dialog box: if the focus is on a selection list, the key opens the list and applies the selected value. ●...

  • Page 62: Means Of Manual Interaction

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Remote monitoring and control of the instrument from a connected computer is also possible with a standard web browser and a LAN connection. For details, refer to the user manual, chapter "Web Control". Alternatively, you can use Virtual Network Computing (VNC), which requires installation of the VNC server on the R&S RTP.
  • Page 63 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument form-related display elements are shown in Figure 3-3. An overview of control ele- ments - like dialog box, toolbar - is given in Chapter 3.3.2.2, "Control elements on the touchscreen", on page 66. Figure 3-3: Display information 1 = Diagram 2 = Grid...
  • Page 64 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument By default, the diagram name contains the diagram number and the short names of the waveforms shown inside. To change the diagram name, touch and hold the tab name. The on-screen keyboard opens to enter the new name. Names must be unique. To arrange the diagrams on the screen, the Rohde &...
  • Page 65 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-6: Acquisition label on the toolbar 1 = Sample rate 2 = Record length 3 = Decimation 4 = Number of acquired waveforms Reference point The reference point marks the rescaling center. If you modify the time scale, the refer- ence point remains fixed on the screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
  • Page 66 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-7: Signal label 1 = Vertical scale 2 = Offset 3 = Bandwidth 4 = Coupling 5 = Termination If the signal bar contains many icons and not all icons are visible, touch one of the icons and scroll left or right until the required icon appears.
  • Page 67 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-8: Control elements on the touchscreen = Toolbar = Tab in a dialog box = Dialog box = Result table (docked) = Signal bar = Menu Not shown = Input box Toolbar (1) The icons on the toolbar provide quick and easy access to the most important function- ality.

  • Page 68: App Cockpit

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Result table (4) If you perform cursor or automatic measurements, mask testing, or a search, the result table shows the results of the action. The position of the result table is adjustable. It can be docked (default for measurements), floating, minimized to a result icon on the signal bar, or displayed in a separate diagram on the screen.

  • Page 69: Working With Waveforms

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.4 Working with waveforms The R&S RTP can create and display many waveform types. The most importand are: ● Channel waveforms: Up to three waveforms per input channel can be shown. For a four-channel instru- ment, 12 channel waveforms are available.
  • Page 70 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Waveform handling The R&S RTP can show and analyze many waveforms. To handle this multitude while keeping track of it, the R&S RTP provides intelligent support: ● The color system helps to distinguish the waveforms. The color of the vertical rotary knobs indicates the signal that is focused (selected).

  • Page 71: Rohde & Schwarz Smartgrid

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To select a waveform ► Choose one of the following ways: ● Tap the waveform in the waveform diagram. ● To select a channel, reference, or math waveform, press the corresponding key. ● Tap the signal icon.
  • Page 72 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-9: SmartGrid positions 1 = In the existing diagram, overlay of signal 2 = New diagram on the left or right 3 = New diagram above or below 4 = New diagram on top of the existing diagram 5 = XY-diagram 6 = YX-diagram The diagram configuration is deleted when you use [Preset] and *RST.

  • Page 73: Toolbar

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. To change the size of a diagram, tap the handle between two diagram frames and drag it to the required position. Remote commands: see Chapter 22.7.2.4, "Smartgrid", on page 1163. 3.3.6 Toolbar The toolbar provides direct access to important control and measurement functions.
  • Page 74 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Tap the icon of the function in the toolbar. 3. Check and adjust the settings in the toolbar assist. 4. To define the analyzed area, do one of the following: ● Tap the required diagram. ●...
  • Page 75 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument One-click actions Interactive actions Undo Zoom Redo Search Help Cursor Graphical Saveset Mask Test Saveset Histogram Image Measure Report Quick meas Clear Autoset and Preset Label Run / Stop and Single Save Reference Find Level Save Waveform Force Trigger...
  • Page 76 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The following list describes at first the default toolbar functions and then the additional functions. Undo Undoes the last setting actions step by step. Some actions cannot be revoked: locking the touchscreen with [Touch Lock], and saving data. The undo stack is deleted during the following actions: Reloading settings from file, and reference waveform actions (save, load and preset with active reference waveform).
  • Page 77 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Run / Stop and Single Starts and stops the continuous acquisition, or starts a defined number of acquisition cycles. The icons have the same functionality as the corresponding keys on the front panel. They are useful when you control the instrument remotely. Find Level Analyses the signal and sets the trigger level to the middle of the signal peaks.
  • Page 78 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Performs a search. Tap the icon and adjust the settings in the sidebar. Tap the diagram with the waveform to be searched, or drag a rectangle to define a search gate. The search is performed on the selected waveform. Cursor The cursor icon shows the last selected cursor type.
  • Page 79 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Transforms a waveform to the frequency spectrum by fast Fourier transform (FFT). The FFT trace is shown in a new diagram. Tap the icon and adjust the settings in the toolbar assist. Tap the diagram with the waveform to be transformed.

  • Page 80: Displaying Results

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.7 Displaying results The results of measurements, mask tests, searches, protocol decoding and others are displayed immediately. There are several places to display the results: ● In a table that is docked below the diagram (not available for mask test results) ●...

  • Page 81: Using Dialog Boxes

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 1 = Floating result box 2 = New tab 3 = Table in a tab above or below 4 = Table in a tab on the left or right To open the corresponding setup dialog box 1.
  • Page 82 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Go back: opens the previously opened dialog box. Go forward: opens the next dialog box. Minimizes the dialog box to a small box that only contains the last selected function. Closes the dialog box. For direct access to important control and measurement functions, use the toolbar, see Chapter 3.3.6, "Toolbar",...

  • Page 83: Entering Data

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To close a dialog box ► Tap the "Close" icon in the upper right corner. 3.3.9 Entering data To set parameter values and enter other data, you use the various knobs and the on- screen keypad or keyboard.
  • Page 84 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Enter the numeric value using the following methods: ● To use the default value, tap "Reset" (if available). ● To use the minimum or maximum value, tap "Min" or "Max", respectively. ● To increase the displayed value in fixed steps, tap "Inc".

  • Page 85: Instrument Information And Notifications

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Enter the text as you would on a normal keyboard. ● To enter a series of capital characters, tap "Caps". To enter one capital character, tap "Shift". ● To use the currently defined value, tap "Cur". This is the value that was used before the keyboard was displayed.

  • Page 86: Getting Information And Help

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ► To see the instrument information, tap the Rohde & Schwarz logo. Notifications are status messages, information on mismatching settings and similar information. They are displayed for a few seconds and saved. The color of the dot before the text indicates the severity: gray for information, orange for warnings, and red for errors.
  • Page 87 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.11.1 Displaying help To display tooltips and context help 1. Enable the "Help" icon on the toolbar. 2. Tap the parameter for which you need information. The tooltip opens. 3. To open the corresponding help topic, tap the "Show Help" button in the lower right corner of the tooltip.
  • Page 88 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To search for a topic in the index The index is sorted alphabetically. You can browse the list, or search for entries in the list. 1. Switch to the "Index" tab. 2. Select the "Keyboard" icon besides the entry field. 3.

  • Page 89: Instrument Setup

    ® Instrument setup R&S System settings 4 Instrument setup Access: "Settings" menu > "Settings" dialog. In the "Settings" dialog, you can adapt various instrument settings to your require- ments, such as language, display appearance, and assign functions to some keys. The following settings and procedures are described in the current chapter: ●...

  • Page 90: About Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S System settings 4.1.1 About settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "System" > "About" FW Update Opens the Firmware update dialog box. Copy to clipboard Copies the instrument information, which you see in the dialog box, to the clipboard. Open Source Ack Opens the open source acknowledgment document, which provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software.
  • Page 91 ® Instrument setup R&S System settings Device name Indicates the currently defined computer name, the defined IP address and DHCP address enabling. These values are required to configure the instrument for work in a network. NOTICE! Risk of network problems. All parameters can be edited here; however, beware that changing the device name has major effects in a network.

  • Page 92: Gpib Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S System settings Parameter Value TCP/IP mode DHCP + auto IP address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's web browser. Advanced Opens the standard Windows "Network Connections" dialog box to configure a net- work connection.

  • Page 93: Users Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings Time settings Opens the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box to set the correct date and time. Only users with administrator rights can fulfill this task. Note: Usually date and time are set correctly. To adjust your regional time, select the correct time zone rather than changing the time.

  • Page 94: Software Options Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings The license type defines the duration of applicability and the portability of a license. The following license types are provided: evaluation, permanent, portable, quantified, timed with duration of 1, 3, 6 or 12 months. A license can also be in the states deacti- vated and expired.
  • Page 95 ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings Install from file If you got a license file, install the license here. Tap "Open" to open the file selection dialog, or enter the complete path and filename. For details, see Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 509.

  • Page 96: Hw Options Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings a) Optional: If the status icon ( , ) in the Windows notification area is not shown yet, click "Start > All Programs > R&S License Server > License Server Manager"". The icon is now available in the Windows notification area. b) Optional: If the status is (stopped), select the icon, and then select "Start...
  • Page 97 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Color source Selects the waveform to which the color table and the labels are assigned. A spectrogram (option R&S RTP-K37) always has the same color as the math (spec- trum) waveform from which it is created. Use color table If enabled, the selected waveform is displayed according to its assigned color table.

  • Page 98: Color Tables

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings ● Serial buses if a protocol option is activated ● Parallel buses if MSO option is installed See also: Chapter 4.3.2, "Color tables", on page 98 Remote command: on page 1159 DISPlay:COLor:SIGNal<m>:ASSign Set to default color Resets the color of the selected waveform to the factory default.

  • Page 99: Grid Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings The editing table allows you to edit existing color tables or add new ones that can then be assigned to the waveforms. See also: ● "Assigned color table" on page 97 Remote commands The following remote commands are used to configure color tables: on page 1160 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:COUNt? on page 1160...
  • Page 100 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show grid If selected, a grid is displayed in the diagram area. A grid helps you associate a spe- cific data point to its exact value on the x- or y-axis. Remote command: on page 1162 DISPlay:DIAGram:GRID Show labels If selected, labels mark values on the x- and y-axes in specified intervals in the dia-...

  • Page 101: Diagram Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show crosshair If selected, a crosshair is displayed in the diagram area. A crosshair allows you to select a specific data point by its co-ordinates. Remote command: on page 1162 DISPlay:DIAGram:CROSshair Keep X-grid fixed If enabled, the vertical grid lines remain in their position when the horizontal position is changed.
  • Page 102 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show tabs always If selected, the tab titles of all diagrams are displayed: "Diagram1", "Diagram2" ... If cleared, the tab titles are not shown except for titles in a tabbed diagram. In tabbed diagrams, the tab titles are required to change the tabs. Remote command: on page 1167 DISPlay:DIAGram:TITLe...

  • Page 103: Annotations Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Make sure that the option is disabled if the zoom area and the evaluation gate are of nearly the same size to avoid conflicts in operation. Gate transparency Sets the transparency of the area that is defined as measurement or search gate. The setting only takes effect if "Show gate"...
  • Page 104 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show / Source Selects the souce of the label and enables the display. Remote command: on page 1171 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:SHOW Position mode Defines the label position either relative to the diagram or with absolute values accord- ing to the units of the waveform.

  • Page 105: Dialogs Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Labels For each waveform, the "Labels" table shows the assigned texts and their positions. Enter the label text and the horizontal and vertical positions for each label. "Add" Adds a line at the end of the list. "Copy"...

  • Page 106: Cursor Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Font size ← Dialog Defines the font size of the text in dialog boxes. Dialog transparency ← Dialog Defines the transparency of the dialog box background. For high transparency values, you can see the waveform display in the background, and possibly check the effect of the changed setting.

  • Page 107: Measurement Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Cursor style Defines how the cursor is displayed in the diagram. "Lines" The cursors are displayed as lines. "Line & Rhom- The cursors are displayed as lines. The intersections of the cursors bus" with the waveforms are displayed by rhombus-shaped points. The cursors are displayed as vertical lines.
  • Page 108 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Group results If enabled, all results are shown in one result box (default). If disabled, the results of each measurement group are shown in a separate result box. The default position is ignored. The setting affects all measurements except for the peak list. Remote command: on page 1175 MEASurement<m>:DISPlay:GROuping...

  • Page 109: Peak List Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings 4.3.9 Peak list appearance settings Access: "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Peak List" tab For peak lists measurements only, requires option R&S RTP-K37. You can enable the "Peak list" for "Spectrum" measurements, see Chapter 8.2.7, "Spectrum measure- ments", on page 369.
  • Page 110 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show labels Switches the display of the mask test name on or off. To change the name of the mask test, open the "Mask Test" dialog > "Define Mask" tab. Double-tap the mask test subtab and enter the new mask test name. Remote command: on page 1177 MTESt:LABel...

  • Page 111: Protocol Appearance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Color Sets the color of samples that violated the mask. Remote command: on page 1178 MTESt:COLor:MATCh Mask without violation Sets the color of masks segments that were not hit. Remote command: on page 1178 MTESt:COLor:UNMatch Mask with violation Sets the color of mask segments the signal has entered into.

  • Page 112: Display Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Table position Defines the position of the decode table on the screen. "Floating" Floating result box in front of the diagrams. "Preview"" Result icon on the sidebar. "Docked" Fixed tab below the diagrams. Remote command: on page 1551 DISPlay:RESultboxes:DEPosition 4.4 Display settings...

  • Page 113: Signal Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Enable If enabled, each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration that is defined using Time, or as long as Infinite persistence is selected. If disabled, the waveform points are displayed only for the current acquisition. Remote command: on page 1180 DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe]...

  • Page 114: Backlight Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Intensity This value determines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram. Enter a per- centage between 0 (not visible) and 100% (strong). The default value is 50%. You can also use the [Intensity] knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the wave- form intensity directly.

  • Page 115: Monitors Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Brightness Changes the background luminosity of the touchscreen. 4.4.4 Monitors settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Display" > "Monitors" In the "Monitors" tab you can extend or duplicate the instrument display to a second monitor or projector (external display).

  • Page 116: Performance Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings ● "Projector only": the instrument's user interface is only shown on the external dis- play, the instrument display is off. ● "Additional settings": opens the Windows configuration for display settings. 4.4.5 Performance settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Display" > "Performance" Show Displays the "Performance"...
  • Page 117 ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings Camera hardkey action The Camera key on the left side of the display is a shortcut key that initiates an associ- ated action. You can assign one of the following actions: ● Save a screenshot ●...

  • Page 118: Knobs

    ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings 4.5.2 Knobs Access: "Settings" > "Frontpanel" > "Knobs" Vertical.........................118 Horizontal........................118 Acceleration method....................118 Acceleration interval....................118 Vertical The vertical Position knob can change the waveform position or the offset of the selected waveform. Select the action that you want to perform. See also: "[Position] (upper knob)"...

  • Page 119: Touchscreen

    ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings Furthermore, when you turn the knob slowly during fine-tuning, subsequent move- ments that occur during the same interval are accelerated, making precise selection difficult. 4.5.3 Touchscreen Access: "Settings" > "Frontpanel" > "Touchscreen". Capture region Defines the number of pixels around each element (e.g.

  • Page 120: Aligning The Touchscreen

    ® Instrument setup R&S Preset setup Brightness Defines the luminosity of illuminated front panel keys and knobs. 4.5.5 Aligning the touchscreen When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially calibrated. However, to ensure that the touchscreen responds to the finger contact correctly, a touchscreen alignment is required.

  • Page 121: User-Defined Preset - Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Preset setup 4.6.1 User-defined preset - settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Preset" > "Settings" tab Preset Performs a user-defined preset of the instrument. Saveset to be loaded on preset The file name with extension .dfl to load or to save the settings to. For details, see .Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog",...

  • Page 122: Restoring Settings

    ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 4.6.3 Restoring settings When you have changed many different settings on the instrument and are no longer sure which settings are causing which effect in the measurement, you may want to restore the default settings and start anew. The following methods are available: ●...

  • Page 123: Firmware Update

    ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 4.7.1 Firmware update Access: "Menu" > "Settings" >"Maintenance" > "FW Update" Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version. Firmware updates are provided on the internet at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/rtp. The "Release Notes" describe the improvements and modifications of all firmware ver- sions.
  • Page 124 ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings Date / Time / Overall alignment state Show the date, time and the summary result of the self-alignment process: not aligned, passed or failed. Detailed results are provided on the "Results" tab. Remote command: on page 1184 CALibration:DATE? on page 1185...

  • Page 125: Self-Test

    ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 1. Warm up the instrument before you start the self-alignment. The minimum warm-up time is indicated in the data sheet. 2. Remove the probes from the input connectors. 3. In the "Menu" > "Settings" menu, select "Maintenance". 4.

  • Page 126: Maintenance Information

    ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 4.7.4 Maintenance information Access: "Settings" >"Maintenance" > "Hardware" tab > "Advanced" The "Maintenance" dialog box provides information on your R&S RTP configuration, which can be helpful in case you need support. System Info This tab provides general information on the hardware configuration, and indicates where system information can be found on the instrument.

  • Page 127: Save / Recall

    ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall 4.8 Save / recall 4.8.1 Autonaming Access:"Menu" > "Settings" key > "Maintenance" > "Autonaming" tab. 4.8.1.1 Autonaming settings In this tab, you can define the pattern for automatic file name generation. This name is used as the default file name.
  • Page 128 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall Remote command: on page 1184 MMEMory:AUTonaming:TEXT Date If enabled, inserts the current date. Remote command: on page 1183 MMEMory:AUTonaming:DATE Index If enabled, inserts an index. Remote command: on page 1183 MMEMory:AUTonaming:INDex Time If enabled, inserts the current time. Remote command: on page 1183 MMEMory:AUTonaming:TIME...

  • Page 129: Csv Export

    ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall The directory selection dialog box is opened. 5. Select the folder in which the data is stored by default. Use the symbols on the left of the file explorer box to switch to often used directories. 6.

  • Page 130: External Application

    ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall Remote command: on page 1546 EXPort:RESult:DELimiter 4.8.3 External application The R&S RTP can start an external application on the instrument or in the network (if connected) when an event occurs. The following events can start an application: ●...

  • Page 131: Acquisition And Waveform Setup

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5 Acquisition and waveform setup This chapter describes the horizontal and vertical settings as well as the acquisition and probe setup. 5.1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems, on acquisition setup and probing.
  • Page 132 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-1: Input range and resolution of the ADC With R&S RTP, you can work with multiple diagrams, and each diagram obtains the full vertical resolution, no matter where the diagram is placed. Therefore, use a separate diagram for each waveform instead of the traditional setup that arranges the wave- forms side by side in one diagram.
  • Page 133 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-3: R&S RTP setup of multiple waveforms in separate diagrams: best resolution 5.1.1.3 Bandwidth For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo- scope bandwidth. The oscilloscope bandwidth should be slightly higher than the maxi- mum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with very little measurement error.

  • Page 134: Sampling And Acquisition

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5.1.2 Sampling and acquisition The vertical system of a digital oscilloscope conditions the test signal in a way that the following A/D converter (ADC) can transform the measured voltage into digital data. 5.1.2.1 Sampling and processing The A/D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples.
  • Page 135 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-4: Waveforms acquired with different sample rates To avoid aliasing, the sample rate must be set to a value 3 to 5 times the fastest fre- quency component of the signal. A higher sample rate increases signal fidelity, increa- ses the chance to capture glitches and other signal anomalies, and improves the zoom-in capabilities.

  • Page 136: Horizontal System

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger. The instrument acquires continu- ously and keeps the sample points to fill the pre-trigger part of the waveform record. When the trigger occurs, the instrument continues acquisition until the post-trigger part of the waveform record is filled.

  • Page 137: Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics When you set up horizontal parameters, you can choose whether the record length or the resolution remains constant. ● With constant resolution, increasing the time scale also increases the record length, and vice versa. You can limit the record length to a maximum value. ●...
  • Page 138 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics An ideal probe fulfills the following requirements: ● Safe and reliable contacts ● Infinite bandwidth ● The probe should not load the signal source and thus impact the circuit operation. ● The connection should not introduce or suppress signal components (hum, noise, filter) and thus degrade or distort the transferred signal.
  • Page 139 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics                   system probe scope To measure the signal with low measurement error, the system bandwidth should be higher than the highest frequency component of the signal.
  • Page 140 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Differential active probes Differential active probes are designed to measure signals that are referenced against each other, and voltages that are not references to ground, for example twisted-pair signal lines. The R&S RT-ZD probes are differential probes with high input impedance, they can be used to measure voltages between any two test points.

  • Page 141: Horizontal

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal Differenti alGain CMRR  CommonMode Gain In addition, the R&S ProbeMeter of R&S RT-ZD differential probes can measure differ- ential and common mode DC voltages. The measurement result is displayed on the oscilloscope's screen. The common mode measurement of the R&S ProbeMeter allows you to check the input voltage relative to ground.
  • Page 142 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal Time scale Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms in seconds per division. Increase the scale to see a longer time interval of the waveform. Decrease the scale to see it in more detail. The scale has a point that remains fixed on the screen when the scale value is changing - the reference point.

  • Page 143: Zoom Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal 5.2.2 Zoom settings The zoom settings are described in Chapter 7.1, "Zoom", on page 272. 5.2.3 Roll settings Access: "Menu" > "Horizontal" > "Roll" tab. In this dialog, you can define the roll mode. Roll mode Selects, if the roll mode is set automatically by the instrument or if it is turned off.

  • Page 144: Horizontal Accuracy

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy If the acquisition time is >50 s, the record length limit is effective, and the maximum sample rate depends on the acquisition time: ≤ 100 MSa / Acquisition time. Sample rate If the acquisition time is <50 s, the maximum sample rate in roll mode depends on the number of active channels: Sample rate = 2 MSa/s / Number of active wfms.
  • Page 145 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy Make sure that the correct channel tab is selected. User skew If enabled, the "Skew offset" value is used for compensation. Remote command: on page 1248 CHANnel<m>:SKEW:MANual Skew offset Sets a delay value, that is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument automatically.

  • Page 146: Reference Clock (Ocxo)

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy "Active probe" Shows the type of the probe that is connected to the selected chan- nel. "Probe group Shows the result of the probe skew measurement on the selected channel. delay" Remote command: on page 1248 PROBe<m>:SKEState Total skew offset...

  • Page 147: Aux Out

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Remote command: on page 1251 SENSe[:ROSCillator]:EXTernal:FREQuency Use external reference Enables the use of the external reference signal instead of the internal OCXO refer- ence. If an external reference is used, the frequency of the reference output signal is the same as of the reference input signal.
  • Page 148 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Sample rate Sets the number of captured waveform points per second. It considers the samples of the ADC, and the reduction of waveform points by decimation. If interpolation is not active, the sample rate is the reciprocal value of the resolution and thus also depends on the acquisition time and the record length.
  • Page 149 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Average count (N-single count) Access: ● "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Setup" tab > "Average count (N-single count)" ● "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Segmented" tab > disable "Acquire maximum" > "Required" ● [Math] > "Setup" tab > "Mode" is not "Off" > "Average count" The acquisition and average count has several effects: ●...

  • Page 150: Mode Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings "Resolution" With constant resolution, increasing the time scale also increases the record length, and vice versa. You can limit the record length to a maximum value. "Record With constant record length, increasing the time scale coarsens the length"...
  • Page 151 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Mode Selects the decimation mode. Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate and a less precise time resolution. The R&S RTP uses decimation, if the waveform "Sample rate" is less than the ADC sample rate.
  • Page 152 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Wfm Arithmetic Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisi- tions of the signal. The arithmetic works with interpolated and decimated waveforms. This setting is waveform-specific. The methods are: "Off" The data of only one acquisition is recorded according to the decima- tion settings.

  • Page 153: Segmented Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings The acquisition and average count has several effects: ● It sets the number of waveforms acquired with [Single] ● It defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform. Thus, the instrument acquires sufficient waveforms to calculate the correct average if "Average"...
  • Page 154 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Fast segmentation Switches the fast segmentation mode on and off. Remote command: on page 1198 ACQuire:SEGMented:STATe Number of acquisitions You can define the number of acquisitions to be stored in a fast segmentation acquisi- tion series: ●...

  • Page 155: High Definition Mode

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Remote command: on page 1199 ACQuire:SEGMented:AUToreplay Display time Defines the display speed of the fast segmentation acquisition series. Display starts after the series has been captured completely. 5.4.4 High definition mode The high definition mode offers up to 16 bits of vertical resolution. Higher vertical reso- lution reduces quantization noise and acquires waveforms of higher accuracy with finer details of the signal to be seen.
  • Page 156 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Figure 5-5: Setting the instrument into high definition mode Enable Enables the higher digital resolution, up to 16 bit. Remote command: on page 1250 HDEFinition:STATe Bandwidth Sets the filter bandwidth for the high definition mode. The maximum filter bandwidth is 2GHz.
  • Page 157 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings The waveform values are recorded with 16-bit word length, except for peak detect dec- imation (2 values with 8 bit). Vertical system The current bandwidth is shown in the channel label. In the "Vertical" > "Bandwidth" dialog (C<x>), the "Bandwidth" setting is not available because the bandwidth is set by the high definition filter.
  • Page 158 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings History Due to the 16-bit word length, the history depth is reduced, less waveforms are saved than in normal mode. Export In high definition mode, waveform data in raw format is exported to file with 16-bit word length, except for peak detect decimation (2 values with 8 bit).

  • Page 159: History Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup 5.4.5 History settings The history settings are described in Chapter 7.4.2, "History setup", on page 310. 5.5 Vertical setup The "Vertical" dialog box contains all channel-dependent settings and information. 5.5.1 Setup settings Access: "Menu"...
  • Page 160 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup Scale Defines the vertical scale in Volts per division. Increasing the scale compresses the display of the signal. Remote command: on page 1200 CHANnel<m>:SCALe Offset The offset voltage is subtracted to correct a signal with DC offset. The vertical center of the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is repositioned within the diagram area.

  • Page 161: Bandwidth Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup "AC" Connection with 1 MΩ termination through DC capacitor, removes DC and very low-frequency components. If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect, and voltage is applied to the instrument with factor 1:1. Observe the voltage limits, otherwise you can damage the instrument.

  • Page 162: Probes Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup The specified bandwidth indicates the range of frequencies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3dB attenuation. The probe has also a limited bandwidth and thus affects the resulting system bandwidth. See also: Chapter 5.1.1.3, "Bandwidth",...

  • Page 163: Digital Filter Setup

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation Consider a voltage divider that is part of the DUT before the measuring point. The external attenuation is included in the measurement, and the instrument shows the results that would be measured before the divider. External attenuation can be used with all probes.

  • Page 164: Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Filter on channel: On | Off Enables the DSP filter for the correspondig input channel. Remote command: on page 1247 CHANnel<m>:DIGFilter:STATe Cut-off Sets the limit frequency of the lowpass filter for input channels. Remote command: on page 1247 CHANnel<m>:DIGFilter:CUToff...

  • Page 165: Shared Probe Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes The functionality on the "Probes" tab changes according to the type of the attached probe. Probes with Rohde & Schwarz probe interface (probe box), and also many other passive voltage probes, are recognized by the instrument. The R&S RTP reads out the main characteristics of the probe and displays them.
  • Page 166 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes An external attenuation can be set on the "Other" tab, see "External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation" on page 163. The shared probe settings are: Type, Name, Bandwidth....................166 Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero..................166 Type, Name, Bandwidth The fields show the characteristics of a recognized or predefined probe for information.

  • Page 167: Settings For The R&S Probe Interface (Voltage Probes)

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes To correct the zero error of voltage probes, short the signal pin and the ground pin together and connect them to the ground of the DUT. Then tap "Detect AutoZero". While the alignment is running, the instrument switches to DC coupling to display the waveform correctly.
  • Page 168 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Probe unit, Auto attenuation If the probe is recognized by the R&S RTP, the instrument reads the attenuation unit and value from the probe an displays them. Remote command: on page 1207 PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation[:AUTO]? Micro button action Active voltage probes with Rohde &...
  • Page 169 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "Probe mode" Only available if a R&S RT-ZM modular probe is connected. Sets the measurement mode of the modular probe. See also "Probe mode" on page 178. "Probe Setup" Opens the "Probes Setup" dialog box. Remote command: on page 1209 PROBe<m>:SETup:MODE...

  • Page 170: Setup For Passive Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes The ProbeMeter always measures the common mode and differential voltages. Single-ended voltages are calculated values: + 0.5 * V and V - 0.5 * V Remote command: on page 1211 PROBe<m>:PMETer:VISibility on page 1211 PROBe<m>:SETup:DISPlaydiff on page 1211 PROBe<m>:PMETer:RESults:SINGle?
  • Page 171 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-6: Probe setup for passive probe The following shared probe settings are available: ● "Type, Name, Bandwidth" on page 166 ● "Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero" on page 166 If a passive probe is connected, the probe attenuation is read out and shown in the "Setup"...

  • Page 172: Setup For Active Voltage Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Vertical unit, Attenuation, Gain If a predefined probe is connected and selected, the attenuation or gain values are shown. For unknown probes and passive probes in manual mode, you can set user-defined values for unit, gain and attenuation. If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect, and voltage is applied to the instrument with factor 1:1.
  • Page 173 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.4.1 R&S RT-ZS single-ended probes Figure 5-7: Probe setup for active single-ended probe R&S RT-ZS20 The only setting for R&S RT-ZS probes is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 160. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 174 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.4.2 R&S RT-ZD differential probes Figure 5-8: Probe setup for active differential probe R&S RT-ZD40 The offset is the differential offset. See "Offset" on page 160. Specific settings for R&S RT-ZD probes are the following: CM offset Sets the common-mode offset to compensate for a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets (referenced to the ground socket).
  • Page 175 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1216 PROBe<m>:SETup:ZAXV 5.6.4.3 R&S RT-ZPR power rail probes Figure 5-9: Probe setup for power rail probe R&S RT-ZPR The offset is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 160. If the ProbeMeter is active, an additional function is provided in the "ProbeMeter"...
  • Page 176 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes AC Coupling Enables AC coupling in the R&S RT-ZPR power rail probes, which removes DC and very low-frequency components. The R&S RT-ZPR probe requires 50 Ω input termina- tion, for which the channel AC coupling is not available. The probe setting allows AC coupling also at 50 Ω...

  • Page 177: Modular Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Range Sets the voltage range of a R&S RT-ZHD probe. You can set the range on the probe control box or at the oscilloscope. "Auto" The voltage range is set only at the oscilloscope with "Vertical scale". "Low"...
  • Page 178 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ● "ProbeMeter" on page 169 ● Setup parameters of modular probes..............178 ● Deembedding for modular probes.................179 ● Termination voltage with R&S RT-ZMA40 SMA module........181 5.6.5.1 Setup parameters of modular probes The basic setup parameters of all modular probes are the measurement mode and the offset settings.
  • Page 179 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "DM" Differential mode input voltage (V ), the voltage between the positive and negative input terminal. "CM" Common mode input voltage (V ), the mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground. "P"...
  • Page 180 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes If R&S RT-ZMA40 is selected, choose also the used submodule: semi-rigid cables or none. For the browser module R&S RT-ZMA30, measure the space between the pins, and select the appropriate value. Remote command: on page 1222 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:TIPModule[:SELect] on page 1222...
  • Page 181 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 2299 DEEMbedding<m>:COMPonent<n>:LOAD:IMPedance? on page 1224 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:LOAD:IMPedance? 5.6.5.3 Termination voltage with R&S RT-ZMA40 SMA module Termination voltage is relevant if you use the R&S RT-ZMA40 SMA module. The SMA module applies a termination voltage (±4 V) to the DUT to enable measurements against a common mode DC voltage instead of ground.

  • Page 182: Setup For Predefined Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Measurement Shows the measured common mode voltage. Remote command: on page 1220 PROBe<m>:SETup:TERM:MEASure? 5.6.6 Setup for predefined probes Probes that cannot be detected, but their characteristics are known to the R&S RTP are called "Predefined probes". The following shared probe settings are available: ●...
  • Page 183 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-13: Probe setup for R&S RT-ZD01 Specific settings for predefined probes are the following: Predefined probe......................183 Offset to mean......................184 Line impedance......................184 Predefined probe List of probes that are known to the instrument. The instrument lists only probes that match the instrument coupling and, if connected, also the used adapter.

  • Page 184: Setup For Current Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Offset to mean Performs an automatic compensation for a DC component of the input signal using the result of a background mean measurement. The result is shown in "Offset". The func- tion is probe-independent and supports quick and convenient measurements of input signals with different DC offsets.
  • Page 185 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-14: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC10 Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB have a Rohde & Schwarz probe interface; they are powered and remotely controlled by the oscilloscope. When the probe is connected, demagnetization is performed automatically.
  • Page 186 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-15: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC20B For all current probes, attenuation or gain is shown in the "Setup" tab, and you can set the offset to mean: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 168 ●...

  • Page 187: Setup For Unknown Probes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Detect AutoZero If a current probe is connected, the function demagnetizes the probe's sensor head and sets the waveform to zero position to correct the error offset. Thus, it compensates for the remanence and offset caused by temperature drift. For R&S RT-ZCxxB probes, the determined "Zero adjust"...

  • Page 188: Probe Attributes

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-16: Probe setup for an unknown probe Set the unit and the attenuation or gain of the probe: "Vertical unit, Attenuation, Gain" on page 172. 5.6.9 Probe attributes To check the attributes of the connected probes, select "Info" in the "Vertical" > "Probes"...

  • Page 189: Calibration Results

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote commands: ● on page 1227 PROBe<m>:ID:SWVersion? ● on page 1227 PROBe<m>:ID:PRDate? ● on page 1227 PROBe<m>:ID:PARTnumber? ● on page 1228 PROBe<m>:ID:SRNumber? ● on page 1228 PROBe<m>:SETup:CAPacitance? ● on page 1228 PROBe<m>:SETup:IMPedance? 5.6.10 Calibration results To check the attributes of the connected probes, select "Info"...
  • Page 190 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 2. Connect the probe to the adapter. The oscilloscope reads the probe-specific parameters through the adapter. 3. Set up the probe as usual, depending on the type of the connected probe. 4. In the "Adapter Setup", start the self-alignment of the adapter. If the adapter is connected, additional settings are available in several dialog boxes: ●...
  • Page 191 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes In addition to coupling, the signal can be filtered for high frequency rejection, see Chapter 5.5.5, "Digital filter setup", on page 163. "DC 1 MΩ" Connection with 1 MΩ termination, passes both DC and AC compo- nents of the signal.
  • Page 192 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "Bandwidth limit": see "Bandwidth limit" on page 190. Selfalignment Self-alignment compensates measurement errors caused by a difference of termina- tion impedance, or an ambient temperature different from the one at which the factory alignment was done.

  • Page 193: R&S Rt-Zvc Probe

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe 5.7 R&S RT-ZVC probe With the R&S RTP and option R&S RTP-B1E, you can use the R&S RT-ZVC multi- channel power probe. It has an integrated 2- or 4-channel amperemeter and 2- or 4- channel voltmeter.

  • Page 194: R&S Rt-Zvc Overview

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe 5.7.1 R&S RT-ZVC overview 5.7.1.1 Setup Access: [App Cockpit]> "Analysis" > "Multi-channel probe" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct probe is selected on the left side. State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe.
  • Page 195 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Offset The vertical center of the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is repositioned within the diagram area. Negative offset values move up the waveform, positive values move it down. Within a given operation range, modifying the offset is equivalent to moving vertically the display range.
  • Page 196 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth limit of all R&S RT-ZVC probes. The bandwidth specifies the maxi- mum frequency at which a purely sinusoidal signal is still transferred at 89 % (1 dB) of its amplitude.
  • Page 197 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Measurement Impedance Sets the impedance of the probe channel for power calculations and measurements. Remote command: on page 1237 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:IMPedance on page 1232 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:IMPedance 5.7.1.3 Zero compensation Access: [App Cockpit]> "Analysis" > "Multi-channel probe"> "ZeroComp" tab Zero compensation is used to avoid negative currents in measurement results, and to improve the measurement accuracy.

  • Page 198: Zvc Voltage Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe 5.7.2 ZVC voltage settings Access: [App Cockpit]> "Analysis" > "Multi-channel probe"> "Setup" tab > "Setup" icon of voltage channel See also: ● Scale ● Offset Channel Selects the voltmeter channel to be configured. State Enables the corresponding voltage channel of the probe.

  • Page 199: Zvc Current Settings

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Bandwidth Displays the bandwidth of the current channel. You can set the probe bandwidth in the "Setup" dialog. Remote command: on page 1237 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:BANDwidth? Skew Sets the skew, a delay value, that is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument automatically.
  • Page 200 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Channel Selects the amperemeter channel to be configured. State Enables the corresponding current channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1236 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>[:STATe]...
  • Page 201 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Skew Sets the skew, a delay value, that is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensated by the instrument automatically. Remote command: on page 1236 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:SKEW Shunt mode Selects the internal or external shunt mode. Regarding the shunt selection, i.e.

  • Page 202: Differential Signals

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals Max voltage ← External shunt mode Selects the maximum voltage at the external shunt. Remote command: on page 1236 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:SHUNt:MAXVoltage Shunt value ← External shunt mode Sets the shunt value of the external shunt resistor. Remote command: on page 1234 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:SHUNt:EVALue...

  • Page 203: Settings Of Differential Signals

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals 5.8.1 Settings of differential signals Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Differential" Figure 5-18: Setup of differential signals without deembedding Figure 5-19: Setup of deembedded differential signals User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 204 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals Enable Activates the differential signal. Remote command: on page 1244 DIFFerential<m>:STATe P, N Select the analog input channel of the positive and negative signal. You can switch the channels with the arrow button. Using the same input channel for both differential signals is not possible.

  • Page 205: Vertical Setup Of Differential Signals

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals 5.8.2 Vertical setup of differential signals Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Differential" > "Vertical Setup" Scale Sets the vertical scale of differential and common mode waveforms. Vertical settings of P and N output are the vertical settings of the input channels. Remote command: on page 1245 DIFFerential<m>:COMMon:SCALe...

  • Page 206: Deembedding Of Differential Signals

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals 5.8.3 Deembedding of differential signals To remove the parasitic effects of the measurement setup from the measured signal, you can use deembedding for differential signals. Deembedding requires option R&S RTP-K121, and realtime deembedding requires option R&S RTP-K122 in addi- tion.

  • Page 207: Setting Up The Waveform

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform ● Automatic measurements ● Histogram ● Mathematics. In formulas, use DIFF1, DIFF2, COMMON1, COMMON2. ● FFT, spectrogram ● Mask test ● Export of waveform data. You can export the differential and common waveforms if they are selected as output and displayed.

  • Page 208: Setting Up The Signal Input With Autoset

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 5.9.2 Setting up the signal input with autoset Autoset is the solution for the major part of routine test-setup. It is also a good start if you need to use more complex trigger settings. Autoset finds appropriate horizontal and vertical scales, vertical offset, and trigger conditions to present a stable waveform.

  • Page 209: Starting And Stopping Acquisition

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform The settings are described in Chapter 5.4.2, "Mode settings", on page 150. 1. Open "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Mode" tab. 2. To configure the waveform-specific acquisition settings, enable "Multi waveform". Activate the waveforms "W1"/"W2"/"W3"...

  • Page 210: Using The Roll Mode

    ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform To acquire a limited number of acquisitions 1. Check if the trigger mode is set to "Norm". The trigger mode is shown in the trigger label in the upper right corner of the screen. If not, press the trigger [Mode] key on the front panel to toggle the setting.

  • Page 211: Triggers

    ® Triggers R&S Basics of triggering 6 Triggers 6.1 Basics of triggering Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms. Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in analog, digital, and protocol signals. Trigger A trigger occurs if the complete set of trigger conditions is fulfilled.

  • Page 212: Setting Up The Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger Trigger sequence A complex trigger sequence joins two or more separate trigger conditions with an optional delay time and an optional reset time or reset condition. Similar setups are also known as multi-step trigger or A/B trigger. Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the trigger label on top of the signal bar.

  • Page 213: Positioning The Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger ● In the "Mode / Holdoff" tab, set the "Trigger mode" to "Normal". 6.2.2 Positioning the trigger By positioning the trigger on the time axis, you define which part of the waveform is displayed: mainly the pre-trigger part, or the post-trigger part, or the part around the trigger point.

  • Page 214: Qualifying The Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types A dialog opens where you can configure the second event. 6. Optionally, set the "After 1st event wait" that the instrument waits after an A-trigger until it recognizes B-triggers. 7. Set the "2nd event count". The last B-trigger causes the trigger. 8.

  • Page 215: Basic Trigger Settings

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types The settings in the tab are: ● Basic trigger settings.....................215 ● Edge........................217 ● Glitch........................218 ● Width........................219 ● Runt........................220 ● Window......................... 222 ● Timeout......................... 223 ● Interval........................224 ● Slew rate....................... 226 ● Setup & Hold trigger....................227 ●...
  • Page 216 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Source Selects the source of the trigger signal for the current trigger condition. The trigger source works even if it is not displayed in a diagram. It must be synchronized to the signal to be displayed and analyzed. The trigger source can be: ●...

  • Page 217: Edge

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1254 TRIGger<m>:TYPE Find level Sets the trigger level automatically to 0.5 * (MaxPeak – MinPeak). The function is not available for an external trigger source and the TV trigger. Remote command: on page 1255 TRIGger<m>:FINDlevel 6.3.2 Edge...

  • Page 218: Glitch

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). Remote command: on page 1255 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] 6.3.3 Glitch Access: "Menu">"Trigger"...

  • Page 219: Width

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). The range of the trig- ger level is limited in a way so that always a hysteresis for stable trigger conditions is available.

  • Page 220: Runt

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Shorter" Triggers on pulses shorter than the given "Width". "Longer" Triggers on pulses longer than the given "Width". Remote command: on page 1260 TRIGger<m>:WIDTh:RANGe Width For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits ±Delta.
  • Page 221 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Polarity Indicates the polarity of a pulse, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. "Positive" Selects positive going pulses. "Negative" Selects negative going pulses. "Either" Selects both positive and negative going pulses. Remote command: on page 1259 TRIGger<m>:GLITch:POLarity on page 1262...

  • Page 222: Window

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Runt width For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the runt width defines the maximum and mini- mum pulse width, respectively. For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the runt width defines the center of a range which is defined by "±Delta".

  • Page 223: Timeout

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1264 TRIGger<m>:WINDow:RANGe Upper level Sets the upper voltage limit for the window. Remote command: on page 1264 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:WINDow:UPPer Lower level Sets the lower voltage limit for the window. Remote command: on page 1264 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:WINDow:LOWer Time condition Selects how the time limit of the window is defined.

  • Page 224: Interval

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types The timeout trigger checks if the signal stays above or below the threshold voltage for a specified time lapse. In other words, the trigger occurs if the trigger source does not have the expected transition within the specified time. Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition.
  • Page 225 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Slope Sets the edge for the trigger. You can analyze the interval between positive edges or between negative edges. Remote command: on page 1267 TRIGger<m>:INTerval:SLOPe Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display).

  • Page 226: Slew Rate

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types 6.3.9 Slew rate Access: "Menu">"Trigger" > "Setup" tab > "Type = Slew rate" The slew rate trigger is also known as transition trigger. It triggers if the transition time from the lower to higher voltage level (or vice versa) is shorter or longer as defined, or outside or inside a specified time range.

  • Page 227: Setup & Hold Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold. When the signal crosses this level, the slew rate measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope. Remote command: on page 1269 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:SLEW:LOWer Range Selects how the time limit for the slew rate is defined. The time measurement starts when the signal crosses the first trigger level - the upper or lower level depending on the selected slope.
  • Page 228 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Clock source Selects the input channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 1272 TRIGger<m>:SETHold:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time: "Positive"...

  • Page 229: State

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling) Sets the trigger levels and hysteresis values for all channels to the values of the cur- rently selected trigger source. The function affects only the levels defined for the selected condition.

  • Page 230: Pattern

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types The individual settings are: ● "Slope" on page 217 ● "Pattern" on page 230 ● "Trigger Levels" on page 231 ● "Find level" on page 217 ● "Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling)" on page 229 6.3.12 Pattern Access: "Menu">"Trigger"...
  • Page 231 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Channel" Select the channels to be considered. For qualification, you can select all channel signals except for the trigger source. In pattern trig- ger setup, the trigger source channel is selected by default, and you can select all other channel signals.

  • Page 232: Serial Pattern

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types These trigger levels are also used in qualification setup. You can set the trigger levels for all channels to the same value, see "Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling)" on page 229. Additional settings: Timing "Timing"...
  • Page 233 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 Ω. The channel inputs of the R&S RTP have an input impedance of 50 Ω. Make sure to provide the adequate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity. Once the trigger is set correctly, you can use cursor and automatic measurements to perform amplitude and timing measurements.
  • Page 234 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Figure 6-1: Trigger on all lines of a PAL signal with positive signal polarity, trigger level = 300 mV Standard Selects the TV standard or "Custom" for user-defined signals. HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines, the scanning system (p for progressive scanning, i for interlaced scanning) and the frame rate.
  • Page 235 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Odd fields / Triggers on the first video line of the odd or even field. These modes Even fields" are available for interlaced scanning (PAL, PAL-M, SECAM, NTSC, 1080i) and progressive segmented frame scanning (1080p/24sF). They can be used, for example, to analyze the components of a video signal.
  • Page 236 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1297 TRIGger<m>:TV:POLarity Pulse type Sets the type of the sync pulse, either bi-level sync pulse (used in SDTV signals), or tri- level sync pulse (used in HDTV signals). Figure 6-3: Bi-level (left) and tri-level (right) sync pulses This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard"...

  • Page 237: Line Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Scan Sets the scanning system. This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". "Interlaced" Interlace scanning uses two fields to create a frame. One field con- tains all the odd lines (odd, first, or upper filed), the other contains all the even lines of the image (even, second, or lower field).

  • Page 238: Mode / Holdoff

    ® Triggers R&S Mode / Holdoff 6.4 Mode / Holdoff Access: "Trigger" menu > "Mode / Holdoff" tab Holdoff conditions define a waiting time after the current trigger until the next trigger can be recognized. [Run Stop]/[Single] Front panel keys to start and stop a continuous acquisition or a defined number of acquisition cycles, respectively.
  • Page 239 ® Triggers R&S Mode / Holdoff "Repetitive" The instrument starts acquisition immediately and triggers after a short time interval independent of the time base settings and faster than in "Auto" mode. Real triggers are ignored. Use this mode if the "Auto"...

  • Page 240: Conditioning

    ® Triggers R&S Conditioning "Auto" The holdoff time is calculated automatically based on the current hori- zontal scale. "Auto time scaling" defines the factor the horizontal scale is multipied with. "Auto time" shows the resulting holdoff time: Auto time = Auto time scaling * Horizontal scale.

  • Page 241: Actions On Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Actions on trigger "Auto" This is the recommended mode. The hysteresis is set by the instru- ment to reject the internal noise of the instrument. "Manual" The hysteresis is defined directly in absolute or relative values. Remote command: on page 1307 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:NOISe[:STATe] Size mode...
  • Page 242 ® Triggers R&S Actions on trigger The R&S RTP can provide an external trigger signal to synchronize the measurements of other instruments. The trigger out signal is also adjusted and enabled in the "Action" tab. Actions on trigger The trigger can initiate several actions, each time a trigger occurs. To activate an action, set it to "On trigger".

  • Page 243: Qualification

    ® Triggers R&S Qualification Trigger out signal setup Available, if "Trigger out" is set to "On trigger". Defines the pulse that is provided to the [Trigger Out] connector on the rear panel. A trigger out pulse can be provided either when a trigger occurs, or when a mask test violation occurs, or when a limit check violation in a measurement occurs.
  • Page 244 ® Triggers R&S Qualification By qualifying a trigger event, you can logically combine the trigger signal with the state of other analog channel signals. The instrument triggers if both of the following apply: ● The basic conditions of the trigger event definition are fulfilled. ●...
  • Page 245 ® Triggers R&S Qualification Qualification is available for many trigger types: Edge, Glitch, Width, Runt, Window, Timeout, and Interval. Qualification is not possible for the R-event. See also: Chapter 6.7, "Qualification", on page 243 Pattern The pattern contains the channel selection, and the logical operations structure of hardware-based Boolean logic.

  • Page 246: Sequence

    ® Triggers R&S Sequence on page 1302 TRIGger<m>:QUALify<n>:D:LOGic on page 1301 TRIGger<m>:QUALify<n>:D[:ENABle] Trigger Levels Define the trigger level for each input channel. For state and pattern trigger, the trigger level is a decision threshold: If the signal value is higher than the trigger level, the sig- nal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).

  • Page 247: Sequence Setup

    ® Triggers R&S Sequence All trigger sequences require that input channels CH1...4 are set as trigger sources for all conditions. All other input sources are disabled. Trigger sequences are not available if one the following trigger types is set as A-trigger: ●...
  • Page 248 ® Triggers R&S Sequence The reset condition R can be a timeout or a trigger condition, or a combination of both. Sequence Selects the type of the sequence. "A → B → R" Triggers if all conditions of A- and B-events, as well as additional delay and reset timeout or R-event (reset) conditions are fulfilled.

  • Page 249: Zone Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger Reset on event/Reset event If enabled, the trigger sequence is restarted by the R-trigger condition if the specified number of B-triggers does not occur before the trigger conditions are fulfilled. The R-trigger condition is configured in the same way as the A-trigger. The instrument disables settings that do not fit the previous settings in the sequence.

  • Page 250: About Trigger Zones

    ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger To document the trigger events, use the actions on trigger. For example, create a report when the instrument triggers, or save the waveform. You can also combine the zone trigger with common trigger conditions and use one of the following trigger sequences: ●...
  • Page 251 ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger 2. In the signal bar, select if the signal must violate the zone to cause a trigger (Must Intersect), or vice versa (Must Not Intersect). 3. Tap the corner points of the zone on the screen. 4.

  • Page 252: Advanced Setup And Analysis With Zone Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger Clear Expr Deletes the zone trigger expression. The zones are not deleted, they remain as usual masks, and the result boxes of the mask test appear. Delete all Deletes the zone trigger expression and the zones. 6.9.3 Advanced setup and analysis with zone trigger Access: toolbar assist for zone trigger >...

  • Page 253: High-Speed Serial Pattern Trigger (Option R&S Rtp-K140/K141)

    ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) The history saves all acquisitions that fulfill the trigger condition that is set during acqui- sition (zone trigger condition, or another trigger condition). If "Apply zone trigger to his- tory" is disabled, the history "Play" reads and displays all saved acquisitions from the memory.
  • Page 254 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Figure 6-5: High-speed serial pattern trigger dialog 1 = Basic settings 2 = Serial standard 3 = UI offset 4 = Nom. bit rate 5 = Pattern type 6 = Pattern type specific settings Basic trigger settings In the basic settings you need to define if the clock data recovery is used for extracting a clock signal from the signal (enabled CDR), or if a dedicated clock signal is provided...
  • Page 255 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Figure 6-6: Example for a triggering parameters of a recovered clock signal You can define the "Nom. bit rate" of your signal, or use the predefined value of one of the supported "Serial standard"...

  • Page 256: High-Speed Serial Pattern Settings

    ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Pattern settings The pattern settings depend on the selected "Pattern type", see Chapter 6.10.2, "High- speed serial pattern settings", on page 256. 6.10.2 High-speed serial pattern settings Access: "Menu" > "Trigger" > "Setup" tab > "Type = Serial Pattern" The available settings depend on the selected "Pattern type".
  • Page 257 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Clock source Selects the input channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 1272 TRIGger<m>:SETHold:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Together with the clock level, the clock edge sets the point in time when the state of the data signal is checked: "Positive"...
  • Page 258 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) In trigger sequences, another coupling of trigger levels is possible: "Couple sequence thresholds" on page 249. Remote command: on page 1273 TRIGger<m>:SCOupling Serial standard For some serial standards, the bit rate is known to the instrument. Select the standard, and the pattern type is set automatically, no estimation is required.
  • Page 259 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) UI offset Defines the position of the last bit of the bit pattern to be triggered on, relative to the trigger time. The unit interval offset is a number between 0 and 1: ●...
  • Page 260 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Bit pattern length, Bit pattern length A, Bit pattern length B Sets the length of the bit pattern. You can select a value of up to 160 bits. Remote command: on page 1282 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:BITPattern:PTALength on page 1283...
  • Page 261 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) 6.10.2.3 Complex word pattern Within the pattern type "Complex word pattern", a total of four different pattern condi- tions can be triggered on within a data stream. First, aligning to a frame id in form of bit pattern (or timeout) has to be done.
  • Page 262 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Length ← Frame Id Sets the length of the pattern for the trigger alignment condition. Remote command: on page 1285 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:COMPlex:SOFLength Bit Pattern ← Frame Id Sets the bit pattern value for the trigger alignment condition. Remote command: on page 1285 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:COMPlex:SOFPattern...
  • Page 263 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Search range Sets the search range of the respective pattern condition to be triggered. Remote command: on page 1287 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:COMPlex:PATTern<n>:SRNGe Pattern condition Selects the operator for the pattern condition: "Equal", "Not equal", or a range defini- tion.
  • Page 264 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) ● PRBS-15 ● PRBS-16 ● PRBS-17 ● PRBS-20 ● PRBS-23 ● PRBS-29 ● PRBS-31 Remote command: on page 1288 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:PRBS:PSEQuence PRBS Bit error rate Sets the bit error rate for the PRBS sequence. Remote command: on page 1287 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:PRBS:ERATe...
  • Page 265 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Alignment Selects one of the comma control symbols (K28.1, K28.5, K28.7) used for synchroniza- tion. Remote command: on page 1289 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:EBTB:ALIGnment Scramble Selects if the data is scrambled or unscrambled. Remote command: on page 1291 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:EBTB:SCRMble...
  • Page 266 ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Alignment / Sync Sets the alignment pattern. Remote command: on page 1292 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:I32B:APATtern on page 1294 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:I30B:APATtern Skip start Sets the skip start value. It is used to compensate for different bit rates between two communicating ports.

  • Page 267: Configuring The Serial Pattern Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S High-speed serial pattern trigger (Option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Remote command: on page 1293 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:I32B:SYMType on page 1295 TRIGger<m>:SERPattern:I30B:SYMType Pattern Defines the control block or data block pattern in binary or hex format. The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 519.

  • Page 268: External Trigger Input

    ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Setting up a 8B/10B serial pattern trigger 1. Select "Menu" > "Trigger" > "Setup". 2. Select "Type" > "Serial pattern". 3. Enable the "CDR". 4. Open the "Pattern definition" dialog. 5. Select "Pattern type" > "8b/10b". 6.

  • Page 269: Probe Setup: Extern Tab

    ® Triggers R&S External trigger input 6.11.1 Probe setup: Extern tab The "Trigger" > "Extern" tab provides all settings that are relevant for the probe that is connected to the external trigger input. The functionality on the tab changes according to the type of the attached probe.

  • Page 270: External Trigger Setup

    ® Triggers R&S External trigger input ● on page 1213 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:NEGative? ● on page 1213 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:POSitive? ● on page 1211 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:SINGle? Probe attributes: remote commands ● on page 1227 TRPRobe:ID:PRDate? ● on page 1228 TRPRobe:ID:SRNumber? ● on page 1227 TRPRobe:ID:SWVersion? ●...
  • Page 271 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Filter If the selected trigger source is "Extern" (external trigger input), you can directly select a filter to reject high or low frequencies. For all other trigger sources, you can add a digital filter using the Digital Filter Setup. "Off"...

  • Page 272: Waveform Analysis

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7 Waveform analysis This chapter describes general methods to check and analyze waveforms. These are: ● Zoom........................272 ● Reference waveforms................... 282 ● Mathematics......................289 ● History........................309 ● XY-diagram......................315 7.1 Zoom The zoom functions allow you to magnify a specific section of the diagram in order to view more details.
  • Page 273 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Figure 7-1: Numeric zoom using start and stop values – Specifying the x- and y-position of the centerpoint of the area plus a range for the x- and y-axes; the area defined by that centerpoint and the ranges is zoomed.

  • Page 274: Zoom Settings

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.2 Zoom settings The zoom area, i.e. the section to be enlarged, can be defined using two different methods: ● Using the zoom functions on the toolbar and draw the zoom area on the touch- screen ●...
  • Page 275 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom The "Zoom" tab allows you to specify start and stop values for the x- and y-axes. The acquired data within these ranges is zoomed. Additionally, you can enable a "Zoom Overlay" in the "Menu" > "Settings" > "Appear- ance"...
  • Page 276 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom X start ← Start/Stop Defines the lower limit of the zoom area on the x-axis. Remote command: on page 1321 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:STARt on page 1323 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:RELative:STARt X stop ← Start/Stop Defines the upper limit of the zoom area on the x-axis. Remote command: on page 1321 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:STOP...
  • Page 277 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom X range ← Position/Range Defines the width of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1321 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:SPAN on page 1322 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:RELative:SPAN on page 1512 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:ABSolute:SPAN on page 1512 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:RELative:SPAN Y position ← Position/Range Defines the y-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1324 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:POSition...

  • Page 278: Zooming For Details

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.3 Zooming for details The usage of the various zoom methods is described in the following procedures: ● To define the zoom area graphically on the touchscreen ● To define the zoom area numerically using start/stop values ●...
  • Page 279 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Figure 7-3: Zoom diagram and overview diagram 3. If the position of the zoom area is not correct, drag the rectangle in the overview to the correct position. 4. If the size of the zoom area is not yet ideal, tap the rectangle in the overview dia- gram.
  • Page 280 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 5. Select the "Y mode" to define "Absolute" or "Relative" y-axis values. 6. Define the "Y start" and "Y stop" values that define the lower and upper borders (respectively) of the zoom area on the y-axis. When you close the dialog box, the specified area is magnified in a new zoom dia- gram.
  • Page 281 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom An additional zoom diagram is displayed for the new zoom area, and another rect- angle in the original diagram indicates the new zoom area. Each rectangle in the overview has the same color as the corresponding zoom diagram frame. 7.

  • Page 282: Reference Waveforms

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms If you move one of the coupled zoom areas in the diagram, all other coupled zooms are moved as well, and their distance is kept unchanged. To use the hardware zoom In contrast to the normal zoom, the hardware zoom changes the instrument settings - horizontal and vertical scales, and also the trigger level and offset.
  • Page 283 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms 2. Tap the icon. The toolbar assist opens. 3. Set "Update" to the reference waveform to be used. 4. Tap the waveform to be used as reference waveform. To display a reference waveform 1. In the "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab, select "Reference Curve". Alternatively, press the [Ref] key.

  • Page 284: Settings For Reference Waveforms

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms 4. Select the file format. Note: Reference waveforms can be loaded only from BIN files. XML and CSV for- mats are meant for further processing in other applications. 5. To save the waveform to the currently selected file, tap "Save". By default, the pre- fix for reference waveform files is "RefCurve".
  • Page 285 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms In the "Setup" tab, you select the reference waveform and its source. The source can be an active waveform - trace of an input channel, math waveform or another refer- ence waveform - or a stored waveform. R1/2/3/4........................285 Show...........................
  • Page 286 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Remote command: on page 1328 REFCurve<m>:UPDate File Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the selected reference waveform file. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box, see also Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 509.
  • Page 287 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Restore Settings Resets the time scale and the reference point to the original values of the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1330 REFCurve<m>:RESTore 7.2.2.3 Vertical Access: [Ref] key > "Vertical" tab Mode Selects the type of vertical settings: "Coupled to Vertical position and scale of the source are used.
  • Page 288 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms 7.2.2.4 Rescale Access: [Ref] key > "Rescale" tab Vertical Rescaling Stretching and offset change the display of the waveform independent of the vertical scale and position. Enable ← Vertical Rescaling If enabled, the vertical offset and factor are applied to the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1331 REFCurve<m>:RESCale:VERTical:STATe...

  • Page 289: Mathematics

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Mode ← Vertical Rescaling Selects the type of horizontal settings: "Adjust to X The current horizontal settings of the diagram are used. Axis" "Original Scal- Horizontal scaling and reference point of the source waveform are ing"...

  • Page 290: Displaying Math Waveforms

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics The vertical scale of a math waveform is adapted automatically to the measurement results to ensure optimal display. Furthermore, you can scale each math waveform manually in vertical direction like a channel waveform. As for channel waveforms, you can also change the arithmetic mode for the waveform to display the envelope or an average over several calculations.

  • Page 291: Math Setup - General Settings

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.2 Math setup - general settings You can define up to eight different math waveforms. Each waveform is defined in a separate tab in the "Math" dialog box ("M1" to "M8"). The settings for input of mathematical formulas are described in separate chapters: ●...

  • Page 292: Operator Editor

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics The setting is relevant for waveforms with waveform arithmetic mode "Envelope" or with "Peak detect" decimation. All mathematic operations - except for derivation - can be applied to envelope waveforms and waveforms with "Peak detect" decimation. Remote command: on page 1337 CALCulate:MATH<m>:ENVSelection...
  • Page 293 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Source 1 / 2 Defines the signal source to be evaluated by the math function. Waveform 1 of channel signals can be selected. Note: If you require other signal sources not listed here, use the formula editor provi- ded in the Equation tab.

  • Page 294: Equation

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 3. Tap the "Source 1" and "Source 2" icons and select the signal sources to which the math function is applied. For details on available signal sources, see "Source 1 / 2" on page 293. 4.
  • Page 295 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Remote command: ● on page 1337 CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] Buttons of the formula editor and their usage Table 7-1: Basics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression left bracket enclose operands comma separates operands right bracket enclose operands e / π math.
  • Page 296 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression Meas measurement waveform Meas<1...8> Track track waveform Track<1...8> Table 7-3: Cursor keys Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression |← move cursor to beginning ← move cursor 1 step to the left →...
  • Page 297 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4.4 Math functions: bit operations Table 7-6: Bit operations Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression digitize convert to 0 or 1 digitize(x) negation not(x) nand negation of and nand negation of or exclusive or nxor negation of exclusive or nxor 7.3.4.5 Math functions: comparison...
  • Page 298 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4.7 Math functions: correlation Table 7-9: Correlation (More keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEdi- tor expression Cross correlation function of two waveforms correlation(x1, x2, biased) Measures the similarity of two waveforms as a function correlation(x1, x2, unbiased) of a time-lag applied to one of them.
  • Page 299 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Mathematic background for auto correlation: Equation 7-3: Biased auto correlation Equation 7-4: Unbiased auto correlation The R&S RTP uses only the real part of the signal. 7.3.4.8 Math functions: filter and power Table 7-10: Filter and power (More keys) Icon Description Usage, comment, FormulaEditor expression...
  • Page 300 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4.9 Math functions: CDR The clock data recovery function requires at least one of the options R&S RTP-K12, or R&S RTP-K133, or R&S RTP-K134. Table 7-11: Clock data recovery (More keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression CDR: displays the generated clock Software 1: CDR(sw1,x) signal as math waveform...
  • Page 301 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics To get useful results, check and adjust the following settings: 1. Place the analyzed step of the signal in the left half of the time domain diagram. Use the "Reference point" or the horizontal "Position" of the trigger to move the sig- nal.

  • Page 302: Filters

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics The resulting expression could be, for example: rescale(Ch1Wfm1,3,4) 7.3.5 Filters The R&S RTP provides several ways to filter the input signal: ● Lowpass filter by selecting a bandwidth limit in the acquisition path (vertical chan- nel settings) Available with probe adapter R&S RT‑Z1M, see Chapter 5.6.11.1, "Channel set-...
  • Page 303 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics f_g_3dB = (0.001 ... 0.2)* f_a_in for Gaussian FIR filter f_g_3dB = (0,001 ... 0.4)* f_a_in for rectangular FIR filter Where: f_g_3dB = cut-off frequency to be set for the lowpass filter, and f_a_in = recip- rocal of the resolution, or sample rate.

  • Page 304: Math Scale Settings

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics ● Limit is the cut-off frequency ● Shape is gaussian or rectangle for the lowpass filter, and gaussian for the high- pass. ► For example, to set a rectangle lowpass filter on channel 1 with 10 MHz cut-off fre- quency, enter: FIR(lowpass,Ch1,1e+07,rectangle) ►...
  • Page 305 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.6.1 General settings Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto) By default, the vertical scale is adapted to the current measurement results automati- cally to provide an optimal display. However, if necessary, you can define scaling val- ues manually to suit your requirements. Note: When you change the scaling values manually using the "Scale"...
  • Page 306 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics See also: ● Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto) ● Vertical Offset ● Vertical Scale Unwrap If enabled, phase shifts due to a limitation of the value range are eliminated. Remote command: on page 1454 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:UNWRap Unit Defines the scaling unit for phase display.

  • Page 307: Math Arithmetic

    ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Threshold Defines the minimum frequency magnitude for which phases are calculated. This set- ting is only available if "Suppression" is enabled. Remote command: on page 1454 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:THReshold Vertical maximum Defines the maximum value on y-axis for spectrum displays. Only available for "Man- ual"...
  • Page 308 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics "RMS" The root mean square of the math data is displayed. The result is the average power spectrum. If you measure the channel power on this RMS spectrum, you get the same result as for the average channel power measurement on waveforms.

  • Page 309: History

    ® Waveform analysis R&S History Remote command: on page 1197 ACQuire:ARESet:MODE on page 1197 ACQuire:ARESet:TIME on page 1198 ACQuire:ARESet:COUNt 7.4 History The history accesses the data of previous acquisitions and provides them for further analysis. 7.4.1 About history If a continuous acquisition runs, the captured data is stored in the sample memory and the current acquisition is processed and shown on the display.

  • Page 310: History Setup

    ® Waveform analysis R&S History Memory extension The memory can be enhanced with options R&S RTP-B101/102/105/110/120. For details, refer to the "Specifications" data sheet. Quick-access History dialog box When you press the [History] key on the front panel or tap "Display" menu > "Show his- tory", the history mode is enabled and the quick-access "History"...
  • Page 311 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Show history / Export history Enables the history mode and allows you to save history waveforms to file. The history display is enabled automatically when you press the [History] button. It is disabled when you close the quick-access "History" dialog box. For details on data export, see Chapter 12.2.2.2, "Waveform history settings",...
  • Page 312 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Start acquisition Sets the index of the first (oldest) acquisition to be displayed or exported. The index is always negative. Remote command: on page 1342 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:STARt Stop acquisition Sets the index of the last (newest) acquisition to be displayed or exported. The newest acquisition of the complete acquisition series always has the index "0".

  • Page 313: Using History

    ® Waveform analysis R&S History The quick-access history dialog box always shows the relative time. In the "History Viewer" tab, you can select the time mode. Remote command: on page 1344 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:TSDate? on page 1345 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:TSABsolute? on page 1345 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:TSRelative? on page 1345 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:TSRReference? 7.4.3 Using history...
  • Page 314 ® Waveform analysis R&S History 3. Drag the slider to the required acquisition. The current number is shown in the "Current acquisition" field. Alternatively, enter the number of the required acquisition in the "Current acquisi- tion" field. 4. Tap "Play" to start. To replay history waveforms If you want to see the complete acquisition series without any setup, simply tap "Play"...

  • Page 315: Xy-Diagram

    ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram 7. Enable "Export history". 8. If you want to write the timestamps into the data file, enable "Time stamps". 9. To save one waveform out of the history memory: a) Make sure that "Multiple acquisitions in one file" is disabled. b) Enter the number of the required acquisition in "Acquistion index".
  • Page 316 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram Enable If activated, the XY-waveform is active and shown in a diagram, or it is minimized in a signal icon. Remote command: on page 1346 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:STATe X-source Defines the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram. Select one of the following: ●...

  • Page 317: Displaying An Xy-Diagram

    ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram Y-source Defines the source to be used as the y-axis of the XY-diagram. Select one of the fol- lowing: ● One of the waveforms of any channel ● A reference waveform ● The results of a mathematical function Remote command: on page 1348 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:YSOurce...
  • Page 318 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram The diagram is converted into an XY-diagram. To set up an XY-diagram 1. Press the [App Cockpit] key. 2. In the >"Analysis" tab, tap the "XY-Diagram". 3. Enable the "XY-diagram". 4. In the "X-source" field, define the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram.

  • Page 319: Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8 Measurements Using the R&S RTP you can perform and display different measurements simultane- ously, based on the active signal or math waveforms. The color of the results in the result table corresponds with the source waveform color. The following measurement methods are available: ●...

  • Page 320: Using Cursors

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements For details on using the result box, see Chapter 3.3.7, "Displaying results", on page 80 "Result position" on page 107. 8.1.1.1 Cursor measurements on time-based waveforms The cursor for measurement on time-based waveforms returns the following results. The results are displayed automatically when a cursor measurement is enabled.
  • Page 321 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements ● Starting a simple cursor measurement..............321 ● Configuring a cursor measurement...............321 ● Configuring the cursor display................323 ● Saving measurement results to file............... 324 8.1.2.1 Starting a simple cursor measurement To display cursors using the toolbar 1.
  • Page 322 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements The complete configuration of cursor measurements is provided in the "Cursors" dialog box. ► You can adjust the basic settings of an active cursor measurement in the sidebar: cursor type, source, positions, and track. To open the sidebar, tap the icon in the result box.
  • Page 323 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 6. Select the cursor type: horizontal, vertical, or both. 7. Define the position of the cursors: a) To define exact positions of the cursor lines, enter the X-position for each verti- cal cursor and the Y-position for each horizontal cursor. If it is not possible to set horizontal cursors, disable "Track waveform".

  • Page 324: Settings For Cursor Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements To add labels to cursor lines 1. Open the "Cursors" dialog box, for example, with "Menu" > "Cursor". 2. Select the subtab for the cursor set you want to configure. 3. Select the "Advanced" tab. 4.
  • Page 325 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cu1, Cu2, Cu3, Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs. For each cursor set, a horizontal pair of cursors, a vertical pair of cursors, or both can be displayed. Cursor On/Off Enables the selected cursor measurement.
  • Page 326 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements If "Track waveform" is enabled, the user setting is disabled and the measurement results are displayed in the "Cursor Results" box. Remote command: on page 1354 CURSor<m>:Y1Position on page 1354 CURSor<m>:Y2Position Envelope selection 1|2 Envelope selection is effective under the following conditions: ●...
  • Page 327 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cu1, Cu2, Cu3, Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs. For each cursor set, a horizontal pair of cursors, a vertical pair of cursors, or both can be displayed. Coupling (2 follows 1) Couple the horizontal and vertical cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same if one cursor is moved.
  • Page 328 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements X1 label, X2 label Defines a label to be displayed with the vertical cursors. By default, the cursors are labeled as C1.1, C1.2, C2.1, C2.2, C3.1, C3.2, C4.1, C4.2. Y1 label, Y2 label Defines a label to be displayed with the horizontal cursors. 8.1.3.3 Peak search tab Access: [Cursor] key >...
  • Page 329 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Remote command: on page 1350 CURSor<m>:SOURce Absolute Both cursors are set to the absolute peak value. Remote command: on page 1358 CURSor<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] Next absolute Cursor 2 is set to the next smaller absolute peak from the current position. Remote command: on page 1359 CURSor<m>:MAXimum:NEXT...

  • Page 330: Automatic Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements This setting is only available for spectrum waveforms. It is valid for cursor measure- ments, spectrum measurements and peak search. The following figure shows a cursor measurement on a spectrum waveform: If "Peak excursion" is 30 dB, the peaks 1 to 5 are found. If "Peak excursion" is 20 dB, also the peaks 6 to 10 are found.

  • Page 331: Measurement Setup In General

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements surement results per acquisition contribute to the calculation. See: Chapter 8.2.11, "Result analysis", on page 387. ● Limit checks and actions on test result Limit and margin checks evaluate if the measurement result exceeds a specified value.
  • Page 332 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.1.1 Starting an automatic measurement There are three methods to start an automatic measurement, each with slightly differ- ent effects: ● Using the "Measure" icon on the toolbar: See: "To start a measurement using the toolbar icon" on page 332.
  • Page 333 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 3. Select the measurement "Category", for example, "Amp/Time". 4. Tap "Source" and select the waveform to be measured. Spectrum measurements require an FFT math waveform as measurement source. Histogram measurements require a histogram as source. 5.
  • Page 334 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 9. To compile and display statistics for the measurement, enable "Statistics". See also Chapter 8.2.11.1, "Statistics", on page 388. 10. Optionally, perform a limit or margin check as described in Chapter 8.2.12.1, "Per- forming limit checks", on page 396.
  • Page 335 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Enable Starts the measurements of the selected measurement group. Remote command: on page 1360 MEASurement<m>[:ENABle] Category Measurement category. The following categories are available: Time domain: ● Amp/Time: amplitude and time measurements ● Eye: eye diagram measurements ●...

  • Page 336: Measurement Results

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Minimum" Measurements are performed on the lower envelope. Remote command: on page 1373 MEASurement<m>:ENVSelect Statistics Enables the calculation and display of statistical results. Remote command: on page 1410 MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle] 8.2.2 Measurement results By default, the results of automatic measurements are displayed below the waveform diagram when an automatic measurement is enabled.
  • Page 337 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Long-term measurements are performed on the measurement that is selected for analysis and math on the "Result Analysis" tab. See: Chapter 8.2.11, "Result analysis", on page 387 ● Intermediate results You can display auxiliary result lines and reference levels in the source diagram, Chapter 8.2.2.2, "Configuring the results display", on page 338.
  • Page 338 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.2.2 Configuring the results display The measurement results can be displayed in a table below the waveform diagrams, in a floating result box, or in a minimized result icon on the signal bar. The display settings for measurements are provided on the "Gate/Display" tab, see Chapter 8.2.2.3, "Display settings for results", on page 338.

  • Page 339: Measurement Gates

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Result lines Result lines mark the samples in the waveform that are used to obtain the measure- ment result. For example, maximum, minimum, high and low values, and mean are merked by horizontal lines; start and end are marked by vertical lines. Remote command: on page 1409 MEASurement<m>:DISPlay:RESults...
  • Page 340 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 5. Tap the "Use gate" icon to enable the gate usage. The measurement is performed on the selected part of the waveform. The gate is shown in the diagram. 8.2.3.2 Gate settings for measurements Access: [Meas] > "Gate" tab Result display settings are described in Chapter 8.2.2.3, "Display settings for results",...
  • Page 341 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Relative" The gate's start and stop values are defined by a percentage of the value range. Remote command: on page 1450 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:MODE on page 1424 MEASurement<m>:GATE:MODE on page 1508 SEARch:GATE:MODE (Relative) Start Defines the starting value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1450 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt...

  • Page 342: Reference Levels

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If several cursor measurements are enabled, select the cursor set to be used for gat- ing. The "Start" and "Stop" values of the gate are adjusted to the values of the cursor line positions. The measurement is limited to the part of the waveform between the cur- sor lines.
  • Page 343 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements In addition to reference and signal levels, you can define a hysteresis for the middle reference level and tubes for signal levels. Hysteresis is useful for measurements that determine zero-crossings. Period, frequency, and pulse measurements are based on hysteresis - the instrument returns results if the amplitude of the signal exceeds the hysteresis.
  • Page 344 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 4. Under "Level definition", select whether you want to define the levels using abso- lute or relative values. 5. Under "User level", select whether you want to configure the high and low signal levels ("Signal") or the lower, middle and upper reference levels ("Reference"). 6.
  • Page 345 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements To display reference levels and result lines 1. Open "Menu" > "Measure" > "Advanced" tab. 2. Select the tab for the measurement you want to configure. 3. Enable "Result lines" or "Reference levels" option, or both. The reference levels and intermediate results are displayed in the waveform dia- gram.
  • Page 346 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-4: Manual reference level mode, relative level definition In manual reference level mode with absolute level definition, you define the absolute values of high and low signal levels or reference levels, and the distances between ref- erence and signal levels.
  • Page 347 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Signal level Defines the computation method for high and low signal levels. The instrument ana- lyzes the signal, performs amplitude and histogram measurements, and defines the signal levels using the selected method. The selected method is used to compute the signal levels for determination of refer- ence levels in automatic reference level mode.
  • Page 348 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Relative levels Sets the lower, middle and upper reference levels, defined as percentages of the signal amplitude. Available relative levels: ● 5/50/95 ● 10/50/90 ● 20/50/80 ● User defined: Enter "Upper ref level", "Middle ref level", and "Lower ref level". For example, for "5/50/95"...
  • Page 349 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Top distance The distance between the high signal level and the upper reference level - for manual reference level mode and absolute level definition. Remote command: on page 1434 REFLevel<m>:ABSolute:TDIStance Bottom distance The distance between the lower reference level and the low signal value - for manual reference level mode and absolute level definition.
  • Page 350 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements See also: Source Level definition. Hysteresis Defines a hysteresis for the middle reference level. A rise or fall from the middle refer- ence value that does not exceed the hysteresis is rejected as noise. Remote command: on page 1438 REFLevel<m>:RELative:HYSTeresis Top outer...

  • Page 351: Amplitude/Time Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1440 REFLevel<m>:ABSolute:BOTube on page 1441 MEASurement<m>:REFLevel:RESult:BOUTer? Relative outer Defines a percentage of the signal level by which the absolute signal level may be larger than the high signal level or lower than the low signal level to be considered high or low, respectively.
  • Page 352 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The R&S RTP provides various voltage, time, area and counting measurements in the category "Amp/Time". Some measurements require reference levels to be set accord- ing to the measurement purpose. Reference levels are explained in Chapter 8.2.4, "Reference levels", on page 342.
  • Page 353 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Amplitude Amplitude of the signal: the difference of high and low signal lev- Ampl Ampl High Absolute maximum value of the waveform Absolute minimum value of the waveform Peak to peak Peak-to-peak value of the waveform: the difference of maximum PkPk and minimum values...
  • Page 354 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Slew rate rising Steepness of the rising edge: voltage difference between the lower and higher reference level, divided by the rise time. Result in V/s = V*Hz (blue vertical lines in the picture below). Slew rate falling Steepness of the falling edge: voltage difference between the higher and lower reference level, divided by the fall time.
  • Page 355 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Pos. duty cycle Positive duty cycle: Width of a positive pulse in relation to the PosCyc period in %. The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal. Multiple measurements are possi- ble.
  • Page 356 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Setup Setup and Hold time measurement with positive and/or negative Setup clock edge. Hold Hold See: "Setup/Hold measurement settings" on page 360 Setup/Hold time Setup/Hold ratio / (T Setup/Hold ratio measurement with positive and/or negative Setup clock edge.
  • Page 357 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Arithmetic Access: [Meas] > "Meas Group" tab > "Amp/Time" category Table 8-5: Arithmetic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Arithmetic Allows you to perform basic arithmetic operations between selected measurement values and/or constant. 8.2.5.2 Settings for amplitude/time measurements Access: [Meas] >...
  • Page 358 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Data ref level / Reference level................... 361 Pulse count......................... 361 Edges slope........................ 361 Delay to trigger measurement settings............... 361 Signal threshold Defines a signal value that must be exceeded for the signal value to be included in the measurement.
  • Page 359 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Level selection source 1/2": For each measurement source, select the reference level on which the time is measured. "Advanced Delay Setup": With the settings shown in the picture, the time between the second and the fifth rising edge is measured.
  • Page 360 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Setup/Hold measurement settings Setup/Hold measurements analyze the relative timing between two signals: a data sig- nal and the synchronous clock signal. Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge - the time between a data transition and the next specified clock edge.
  • Page 361 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Clock ref level Selects the reference level of the clock on which the time is measured. The intersec- tion of slope and reference level defines the time point for measurements. The setting is used for setup and hold measurements, and for jitter measurements (option R&S RTP-K12).
  • Page 362 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Trigger event Trigger level Trigger source Slope Reference level Measurement source Delay to trigger To configure the trigger conditions, use the trigger setup. To set up the slope, additional settings appear in the measurements "Setup" dialog box. "Edge slope"...
  • Page 363 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Type Selects the type of arithmetic measurement: "Measure- Performs an arithmetic operation between two measurement results. You can select from the measurements enabled for "Amp/Time" or ment" "Spectrum". Figure 8-8: Arithmetic with two measurement results "Constant"...
  • Page 364 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Operand 1 Selects the first operand for the arithmetics. You can select one of the measurements, that is enabled for the current measurement group. Remote command: MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:AMPTime on page 1387 on page 1383 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:AMPTime MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:SPECtrum on page 1384 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:SPECtrum on page 1388...

  • Page 365: Eye Diagram Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1381 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:COUNit on page 1385 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:COUNit 8.2.5.4 Measuring the delay to trigger Delay to trigger measures the time between the trigger point and the following slope of a waveform. If the delay is unknown, it can be measured in two stages - first a coarse and then a precise measurement.
  • Page 366 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The eye diagrams are a superposition of repetitively sampled waveforms, which have a length of about 1 bit. The waveform display style must be set to vectors: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Display" > "Signal" > "Waveform style" = "Vectors". To obtain optimized settings for an eye measurement, use the "Autoset"...
  • Page 367 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-6: Eye measurements Meas. type Description/Result Extinction ratio (%) The extinction ratio is an indication of efficiency. It describes the ratio of the power used to transmit a logic level 1, to the energy used to trans- mit a logic level 0.
  • Page 368 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Eye amplitude Eye top - Eye base Jitter (peak to peak) Average of the jitter for both crossing points. Jitter = (σcrossing1 + σcrossing2) / 2 Jitter (6*σ) Jitter (6*σ) = Jitter * 6 6σ...

  • Page 369: Spectrum Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1390 MEASurement<m>:EYEJitter:AUToscale 8.2.7 Spectrum measurements Spectrum analysis determines the frequencies of a given input signal over time. Vari- ous measurements can then be performed based on the signal spectrum. 8.2.7.1 Overview of spectrum measurements Table 8-7: Spectrum measurements Meas.
  • Page 370 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description, result THD_f, THD_a, These measurements require option R&S RTP-K37 Spectrum analysis. THD_u, THD_r THD_f is the root mean square of the sum of all amplitudes of the har- Total harmonic distor- monic waves in relation to the amplitude at the fundamental frequency tion (first harmonic): THD_a corresponds to THD[dB]:...
  • Page 371 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements For spectrum measurements, make sure that the start frequency and other FFT parameters are set correctly, and the fundamentals are not covered by the DC compo- nent of the signal. Consider also a gated measurement if the instrument cannot return any result.
  • Page 372 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1393 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:CPOWer:CFRequency Occup. BW Percentage of the total power used to determine the occupied bandwidth. Remote command: on page 1393 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:OBANdwidth Threshold Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected.
  • Page 373 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If "Peak excursion" is 30 dB, the peaks 1 to 5 are found. If "Peak excursion" is 20 dB, also the peaks 6 to 10 are found. The cursor position is on peak 6. Remote command: on page 1507 CURSor<m>:PEXCursion on page 1394...

  • Page 374: Histograms And Histogram Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.8 Histograms and histogram measurements 8.2.8.1 Histogram characteristics Histograms are used to plot density of data, i.e. to display graphically how often which signal values occur. The histogram can be based on the input signal levels (ampli- tudes) or the timebase in a time domain measurement, or on frequencies or frequency levels in a spectrum measurement.
  • Page 375 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.8.2 Overview of histogram measurements User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 376 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-8: Histogram measurements Meas. type Description/Result Waveform count The number of acquisitions (waveforms) the histogram is based on Waveform samples The number of samples from the most recent acquisition included in the current histogram Histogram samples The number of samples from all acquisitions included in the current his- togram...
  • Page 377 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Mean ±σ The range between (mean value + standard deviation) and (mean value - standard deviation) σ Mean ±2*σ The range between (mean value + 3 * standard deviation) and (mean value - 2 * standard deviation) σ...
  • Page 378 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.8.3 Creating histograms Histograms can be used to evaluate the sample value occurrences directly. They are a prerequisite for histogram measurements. To create a histogram quickly with toolbar icons 1. Select the waveform for which you need a histogram. 2.
  • Page 379 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8. Enable the histogram. 8.2.8.4 Histogram setup "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Histogram" In this dialog box, you configure histograms on which you can perform further mea- surements. Enable Enables or disables the histogram evaluation and display. The histogram settings are kept until the histogram is deleted.
  • Page 380 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Reset Resets the values to begin a new histogram. Remote command: on page 1404 LAYout:HISTogram:RESet Mode (Horizontal / Vertical) Defines whether the value range limits are entered as absolute or relative values. Remote command: on page 1401 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:MODE on page 1402 LAYout:HISTogram:VERTical:MODE...

  • Page 381: Jitter Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Source Selects the histogram on which the measurement is based. Before, you have to define a histogram, see Chapter 8.2.8.3, "Creating histograms", on page 378. Remote command: on page 1405 MEASurement<m>:HISTogram:SELect Probability domain marker, Reference Defines the marker reference in the probability domain.
  • Page 382 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.10.1 Overview of protocol measurements If option R&S RTP-K35 is installed, enhanced measurements on the supported serial buses are possible. With it, you can measure various dependencies between the frames. Additional to option R&S RTP-K35 you need one of the following serial protocol options: ●...
  • Page 383 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description / result Frame error rate Sum of all frames with errors divided by all frames within the acquisition window Consecutive frame Measures the rate at which at least two consecutive frames have an error rate error 8.2.10.2...
  • Page 384 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The types of available frames and fields are depending on the enabled protocol. Table 8-10: Available protocol frames Protocol Frame Field Address 2. Addr Data MISO Word MOSI CAN/CAN FD Remote Data Data Overload WAKE Data Data User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 385 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Protocol Frame Field RFFE Register 0 Write Register Write Register Read Extended Register Write Addr Extended Register Read Mask Extended Register Write Long Data Extended Register Read Long Interrupt Summary and Identifica- tion Masked Write Master Ownership Handover Master Write Master Read...
  • Page 386 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements on page 1418 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALFrom on page 1418 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALTo Trigger to frame Opens a dialog to set up the parameters for the trigger to frame measurement. The types of available frames are depending on the enabled protocol, see Table 8-10.

  • Page 387: Result Analysis

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Value" Sets a value for the selected field. "Field to be Selects the type of field which value is tracked over time. tracked" Remote command: on page 1419 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:FLDValue:FLD on page 1419 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:FLDValue:FRM on page 1419 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:FLDValue:TRCK on page 1419 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:FLDValue:VAL...
  • Page 388 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.11.1 Statistics Statistics can be compiled for each measurement group separately, and also for long- term measurements. If enabled, statistical results are shown in the result box. By default, all events in each acquisition are measured and incuded in the statitics: the measurement result is not only determined once within one acquisition, but repeatedly, if available.
  • Page 389 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements ● on page 1367 MEASurement<m>:RESult:PPEak? ● on page 1367 MEASurement<m>:RESult:RMS? ● on page 1368 MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev? ● on page 1368 MEASurement<m>:RESult:WFMCount? ● on page 1369 MEASurement<m>:RESult:STARt? ● on page 1369 MEASurement<m>:RESult:STOP? ● on page 1367 MEASurement<m>:ARNames ●...
  • Page 390 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Performing long-term measurements 1. On the "Meas" menu, select "Result Analysis". 2. Select the subtab for the measurement group you want to configure. 3. Under "Long term", tap "Enable". 4. Since the waveform can change in the process of time, enable "Continuous auto scale"...
  • Page 391 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Enabling the track enables also the Continuous auto scale Measure all events in each acquisition. To analyze the track, you can use cursor measurements and zoom. Creating a track waveform 1. Configure the measurement group. 2.
  • Page 392 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Measurement for plot Selects the measurement that is used as source for mathematic calculations, long-term measurements, and histograms. These evaluations are performed on one measure- ment only, not on all measurements of the group. Statistics are calculated for all mea- surements.
  • Page 393 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1411 MEASurement<m>:STATistics:HISTogram Number of bins Sets the number of bins - the number of vertical bars that build the histogram. If "Continuous auto scale" is enabled, the instrument determines the number of bins based on the timebase, the current measurements, and other settings.
  • Page 394 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Analysis scale The measurement scale of a long-term measurement diagram or measurement histo- gram can be set automatically by the instrument, or manually. Use automatic scaling if the measurement is running and you cannot see the expected results.
  • Page 395 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Number of points Defines the total number of points to be displayed in the long-term measurement dia- gram. Remote command: on page 1415 MEASurement<m>:LTMeas:COUNt Scale mode Defines when the points of a long-term measurement are created. If statistics are enabled, each long-term measurement point shows the statistical mean and standard deviation of the results measured during the defined period.

  • Page 396: Limit And Margin Checks

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Measurements / point Defines the number of measurement results from which one point of the long-term measurement is created. This setting is only available if "Scale mode" is set to "Measurements". Remote command: on page 1413 MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RMEascount 8.2.12 Limit and margin checks Limit and margin checks evaluate whether the measurement result exceeds a specified...
  • Page 397 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements ● Not at all. As a result of the limit check, the specified actions are performed and an icon indi- cates the status in the result box. 8.2.12.2 Limit and margin settings Access: [Meas] > "Advanced" tab If a check is selected, tap "Setup"...
  • Page 398 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Limits are stricter than the margins for the value check. Thus, the margins must be within the valid range. If necessary, the limit and margin values are adapted according to the selected valid range. The settings are only visible if "Limit check" is enabled. Remote command: on page 1379 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:LCHeck<n>:LOWer:LIMit...
  • Page 399 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Note that the violation actions do not distinguish between a margin violation and a limit violation. However, different icons are displayed in the result box. For each action, you can define the event on which the action is initiated: ●...

  • Page 400: Quick Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Quick measurements Remote command: on page 1428 MEASurement<m>:ONViolation:RUNexec 8.3 Quick measurements Quick measurement performs a set of up to eight amplitude/time measurements on one source, simply by tapping the "Quick measurement" toolbar icon. The results are displayed in a results box. You can configure the measurement to be included in quick measurement.
  • Page 401 ® Measurements R&S Quick measurements 3. Tap "Add/Remove Measurements". 4. Disable all measurements that you do not need. 5. Select the measurements that you want to add to the quick measurement. 6. Tap "OK". 7. A "Settings" icon indicates whether further settings are required. Tap the measure- ment.

  • Page 402: Spectrum Analysis

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 9 Spectrum analysis The R&S RTP provides two ways of spectrum analysis: ● Basic FFT calculation, which is included in the firmware ● Spectrum analysis option R&S RTP-K37, which provides a wide range of analysis possibilities, for example, spectrogram, cursor and automatic measurements.
  • Page 403 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis The overlapping factor can be set freely. The higher the overlap factor, the more frames are used. This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transi- ent signal effects. However, it also extends the duration of the calculation. The size of the frame depends on the number of input signal values (record length), the overlap factor, and the FFT size (number of samples used for FFT calculation).
  • Page 404 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Gate length Gate position Gate t[s] Center frequency f[Hz] Frequency span Restricting the result range You can restrict the results of the FFT analysis to a specified frequency range. The fre- quency range can be defined in two ways: ●...
  • Page 405 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis (im), the magnitude is displayed. For the "Advanced" mode FFT (φ) function, the phase is displayed. For magnitude display, you can select the scale and range of magnitudes to be dis- played. For linear scaling, the vertical value range of the input signal is used. For loga- rithmic scaling, the logarithmic power of the frequency is displayed.

  • Page 406: Configuring Spectrum Waveforms

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● FFT -dφ*df (group delay): the negative derivative of the phase with respect to fre- quency; useful to measure phase distortion 9.1.2 Configuring spectrum waveforms During FFT analysis, a signal in the time domain is converted to a spectrum of frequen- cies.
  • Page 407 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis The "Formula Editor" is displayed. 4. Delete the contents of the edit field. 5. Tap the "More" key to display further functions in the editor. 6. Tap the required FFT function key. 7. Select the source channel. 8.
  • Page 408 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● Enter a "Start frequency" and "Stop frequency" that define the spectrum. ● Tap the "Full Span" button to display the complete spectrum resulting from the FFT analysis. 5. Define the resolution bandwidth for the FFT result. The resolution bandwidth defines how precise the results are, i.e.
  • Page 409 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● To couple the used record length to the required RBW, select the "RBW con- trolled" option. This option is only available if no gate is being used ("Use Gate" disabled). The required acquisition time for the defined RBW value is indicated. ●...

  • Page 410: Fft Configuration Settings

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis To couple spectrum displays The settings for one or more spectrums can be coupled. Thus, if any FFT setting for any of the coupled spectrums are changed, they are changed for all coupled spec- trums.
  • Page 411 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Type..........................411 Display.........................411 Frequency axis (R&S RTP-K37 only)................411 Center frequency......................412 Frequency span......................412 Full span........................412 Start frequency......................412 Stop frequency......................412 Span/RBW Coupling....................412 Span/RBW Ratio......................413 Resolution BW......................413 Window type........................413 Use color table......................413 Type Selects between the magnitude and phase spectrum type.
  • Page 412 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Remote command: on page 1443 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:LOGScale Center frequency Defines the position of the displayed frequency range, which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2). The width of the range is defined using the "Frequency span" set- ting.
  • Page 413 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Span/RBW Ratio Defines the coupling ratio for Span/RBW. This setting is only available if CALCulate: is ON. MATH<m>:FFT:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO Remote command: on page 1446 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio Resolution BW Defines the resolution bandwidth. Note that the resolution bandwidth is correlated with the span, record length and acquisition time.
  • Page 414 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis If this option is disabled, the preset color of the selected channel source is displayed, and the intensity of the specific signal color varies according to the cumulative occur- rence of the values. For spectrum diagrams, this setting corresponds to the common waveform display.
  • Page 415 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis However, if the maximum number of FFTs is lower than the required number to cover the entire waveform, the waveform may only be analyzed partially. In this case, the "Frame coverage" indicates the percentage of the waveform that was analyzed, i.e. which part of the data was included in the FFT calculation.
  • Page 416 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 9.1.3.3 FFT gating Access: [FFT] > "FFT setup" > "Gate" tab FFT gating allows you to restrict FFT analysis to a certain time base of the input signal. If no gate is used, you can define the record length as dependent on the RBW, or the RBW as dependent on the record length (which is defined by the acquisition time).
  • Page 417 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Zoom ← Gate Definition Zoom coupling is available if a zoom is defined. As long as "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the gate area is defined identically to the zoom area - if you change the zoom, the gate changes as well.
  • Page 418 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Record Length/RBW Coupling The record length and resolution bandwidth are coupled during FFT analysis. If you change one value, the other must be adapted accordingly. You can keep either value constant, thus preventing automatic adaptation when the other parameter is changed. However, this may cause the FFT analysis to fail.

  • Page 419: Spectrum Analysis (Option R&S Rtp-K37)

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) Coupled to M1...M8 Copies the current FFT settings of the selected math waveform (M1...M8) to the other selected math waveforms, and couples those waveforms. Thus, if any FFT setting for any of the coupled spectrums are changed, they are changed for all coupled spec- trums.

  • Page 420: Spectrum Analysis Functions

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.

  • Page 421: Configuring Spectrograms

    ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) ● The THD measurements are an extension to the basic THD measurement. See Chapter 8.2.7, "Spectrum measurements", on page 369 for details. ● Cursor measurements on spectrum waveforms provide easy center definition and peak search functions, see Chapter 8.1.1.2, "Cursor measurements on spectrum waveforms",...
  • Page 422 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) Display........................422 Time line 1/2........................422 Show lines permanently....................423 Display Enables the spectrogram display. If enabled, a new signal icon for the spectrogram is displayed on the signal bar ("SGx"). Remote command: on page 1457 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:SPECtrogram:STATe Time line 1/2...
  • Page 423 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) Show lines permanently Displays the spectrogram time lines in the diagrams until you disable this option. If disabled, only the small arrow icons are permanently visible. The line is only dis- played temporarily when you touch the arrow.

  • Page 424: Mask Testing

    ® Mask testing R&S About mask testing 10 Mask testing 10.1 About mask testing Masks are used to determine whether the signal remains within specified limits, e.g. to uncover signal anomalies or test compliance and stability of digital signals. The limits are specified as "mask", which is laid over the input signal in the display.
  • Page 425 ® Mask testing R&S About mask testing Acq. completed Number of tested acquisitions. Remote command: on page 1474 MTESt:RESult:COUNt:WAVeforms? Acq. remaining Remaining acquisitions until "Average count / Nx Single count" is reached. The value is useful if you test a specified number of acquisitions with action "Stop acquisition"...

  • Page 426: Mask Test Settings

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Test result A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of "Violation tolerance" hits. Remote command: on page 1474 MTESt:RESult[:RESult]? 10.2 Mask test settings 10.2.1 Define mask Access: [App Cockpit] >...
  • Page 427 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Make sure that the correct "Mask Test" tab is selected on the left side before you enter the settings. Remote commands: on page 1459 MTESt:ADD on page 1460 MTESt:REMove Enable Activates and deactivates the mask test. If the acquisition is running, the test starts immediately.

  • Page 428: Mask Definition

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings "Open" Opens a dialog box where you can select the file name. See also: Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 509. "Save, Save Stores the specified file. As" Remote command: on page 1462 MTESt:FILE:NAME on page 1463 MTESt:FILE:SAVE...
  • Page 429 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Alternatively, you can set the corner points on the touch screen and adjust the values in the "Mask Definition" tab. To save the mask, select the "Define Mask" tab and save the mask test. Make sure that the correct "Mask Test"...
  • Page 430 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings on page 1465 MTESt:SEGMent:REGion on page 1464 MTESt:SEGMent:COUNt? Configure Opens a dialog to define the selected segment. Definition of segment The number of the selected segment is shown above the table. In the definition table, the individual points of the selected mask segment are listed with exact horizontal and vertical numerical coordinates.
  • Page 431 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Rescale You can rescale and move mask segments by numerical input of factors and offsets. The values change the selected mask segment and take effect on "Apply". Offset X ← Rescale Moves the mask segment horizontally. The specified offset is added to the x-values of all points of the selected mask segment.
  • Page 432 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings A waveform mask is created from an existing waveform. The waveform builds the upper and lower limit line of the mask, and the limits are moved and stretched. The result is a tolerance tube around the waveform that is used as mask. During mask testing using a waveform mask, the record length is limited to 1 MSam- ple.
  • Page 433 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Signal The reference waveform is created from the selected "Source". Sets the reference waveform from which the mask is created. Create ← Signal Creates the upper and lower mask limit from the "Source" and "Ref used in mark". If the reference waveform was not defined before, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
  • Page 434 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Figure 10-3: Waveform mask with vertical width = 0.5 div Remote command: on page 1470 MTESt:WFMRescale:YWIDth Vertical stretch Sets the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y-direction. The scaling axis is the hori- zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit.

  • Page 435: Actions On Event

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Figure 10-5: Waveform mask with vertical width = 0.5 div and vertical position = -0.5 div Remote command: on page 1471 MTESt:WFMRescale:YPOSition 10.2.3 Actions on event The settings in this tab define what happens when the mask test has failed or when it has passed successfully.

  • Page 436: Mask Display

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Make sure that the correct "Mask Test" tab is selected on the left side before you enter the settings. Beep Generates a beep sound. Remote command: on page 1471 MTESt:ONViolation:BEEP Stop acq. Stops the waveform acquisition on mask violation. Remote command: on page 1472 MTESt:ONViolation:STOP...

  • Page 437: Mask Appearance

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams In this dialog, you can reset the mask results and display the mask. Show mask Switches the display of all mask segments on or off. Mask results > Reset all Clears all totals and results in all "Mask Test" result boxes. Remote command: on page 1460 MTESt:RST...

  • Page 438: Eye Mask Definition

    ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams The general mask test settings are described in Chapter 10.2, "Mask test settings", on page 426. 10.3.2 Eye mask definition Access: [App Cockpit] > "Analysis" tab > "Define Mask" > "Mask Type" = "Eye" > "Setup mask"...
  • Page 439 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams Main width (W1), Minor width (W2) Main width defines the width of all eye mask shapes. Minor width defines the secon- dary width for hexagon and octagon mask shapes. Figure 10-6: Main and minor widths and heights of an octagon eye mask Remote command: on page 1477 MTESt:EYEMask:WIDTh<m>[:VALue]...

  • Page 440: Working With Masks

    ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks Segments Enable the different regions of the mask: "Top", "Bottom", "Left", "Right". The icons copy the eye shape to the left and to the right. Remote command: on page 1478 MTESt:EYEMask:MSKBottom on page 1478 MTESt:EYEMask:MSKTop on page 1477 MTESt:EYEMask:MSKLeft...
  • Page 441 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks The "Masks" toolbar assist opens. 2. Tap the corner points of the mask segment on the touch screen. Tip: To create an exact rectangle, draw the diagonal of the rectangle on the screen. 3.
  • Page 442 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 8. Adjust the horizontal and vertical units if necessary. 10.4.1.2 Modifying user masks To change an existing mask definition, you can also use the graphical method on the touch screen, or the numerical way, or combine both. With the graphical method, you can: ●...
  • Page 443 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks To move a segment on the touch screen 1. Drag&drop the segment to the new position. 2. Tap outside the mask to deselect the mask segment. To move a point on the touch screen 1.
  • Page 444 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks d) To add or delete the selected point, use the buttons below the table. ● "Insert": to add a new point before the selected point. ● "Append": to add a new point at the end of the list. ●...

  • Page 445: Setting Up A Mask Test

    ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 6. To move the selected mask segment, enter the "Offset X" for horizontal direction and the "Offset Y" for vertical direction. The specified offset is added to the corre- sponding values of all points. 7.

  • Page 446: Running A Mask Test

    ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks a) Select "Show hits" to display the sample hits. b) Set the "Show for" time or "Show hits forever". c) Set the "Color" of the sample hits. 7. Define the color of the masks segments depending on the violation state: ●...

  • Page 447: Mask Testing On History Acquisitions

    ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks To load a mask 1. Tap "Open". 2. Select the file from the file selection dialog box. 10.4.6 Mask testing on history acquisitions In the same way as for running acquisitions, you can set up and perform the mask test- ing also on history waveforms.

  • Page 448: Search Functions

    ® Search functions R&S Overview: search definition and results 11 Search functions Search functions allow you to detect and analyze specific events in the acquired data quickly and simply. You can search in various waveforms for several events at once. The search area can be limited by a gate.

  • Page 449: Search Results

    ® Search functions R&S Search setup ● Result presentation For each search, you define how the search results are displayed: in a result table and/or in a search zoom window. Remote commands: ● on page 1481 SEARch:ADD ● on page 1481 SEARch:REMove 11.1.2 Search results The results are displayed in a "Search Results"...

  • Page 450: Search Criteria

    ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.1 Search criteria Access: "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Search" > "Setup" tab Enable If you enable a search and run an acquisition, the search is performed continuously on the acquired data until acquisition is stopped. If acquisition is stopped and you enable a search, the data of the last acquisition is searched.

  • Page 451: Search Parameters

    ® Search functions R&S Search setup Depending on the selected source, different search criteria are available. Remote command: on page 1481 SEARch:SOURce Edge, Glitch, Width, Runt, Window, Timeout, Interval, Slew rate, Setup & Hold, State, Pattern Search criteria for analog and digital input signals, math and reference waveforms, and tracks.
  • Page 452 ® Search functions R&S Search setup For serial protocol options, search on a serial bus is available. These searches have protocol-specific search criteria. For details, see the relevant chapters of the "Protocol Analysis" chapter. ● Edge........................452 ● Glitch........................453 ● Width........................
  • Page 453 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.2.2 Glitch The glitch search works the same way as the glitch trigger. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy from trigger The glitch search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Width See trigger settings: ●...
  • Page 454 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Width, ±Delta See trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 219 While the width trigger can only analyze positive or negative polarity, searching for a width is also possible for both polarities at the same time ("Either"). ●...
  • Page 455 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Runt width, ±Delta Time limit for the runt, see trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 218 ● "Range" on page 221 ● "Runt width" on page 222 ● "±Delta" on page 222 Remote command: on page 1488 SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity...
  • Page 456 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Vertical condition Defines the run of the signal relative to the window, see "Vertical condition" on page 222. Remote command: on page 1496 SEARch:TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe Time condition, Width, ±Delta Set the time limit for the vertical condition, see: ●...
  • Page 457 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Range, Time Set the timeout condition, see: ● "Range" on page 224 ● "Time" on page 224 Remote command: on page 1493 SEARch:TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe on page 1493 SEARch:TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search. The value is used for all search event types that require one trigger level.
  • Page 458 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Slope, Range, Interv. width, ±Delta Set the interval condition, see: ● "Slope" on page 225 While the interval trigger can only analyze rising or falling edges, searching for a width is possible for both edges at the same time ("Either"). ●...
  • Page 459 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Slew rate, ±Delta ● "Slope" on page 217 ● "Range" on page 227 ● "Slew rate" on page 227 ● "±Delta" on page 227 Remote command: on page 1491 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:SLOPe on page 1491 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:RANGe on page 1492 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:TIME...
  • Page 460 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Clock source, Clock edge, Clock level Set the clock settings. Both "Clock level" and "Clock edge" define the starting point for calculation of the setup and hold time. Remote command: on page 1499 SEARch:TRIGger:SETHold:CSOurce on page 1498 SEARch:TRIGger:SETHold:CEDGe on page 1499...
  • Page 461 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.2.10 State The state search is a qualified edge search. The state search is only available for ana- log channel sources (Ch1 to Ch4). Clock source, Clock edge Define the clock settings. The clock signal is the waveform to be searched. Remote command: on page 1505 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce...

  • Page 462: Frequency Marker Search

    ® Search functions R&S Search setup Pattern Pattern search settings are the same as for the pattern trigger. See also "Pattern" on page 230. Remote command: on page 1501 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A[:ENABle] on page 1501 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A:LOGic on page 1502 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:AB:LOGic on page 1502 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ABCD:LOGic Timing condition: Mode, Range, Time, Width, ±Delta Additional time limitation to the pattern, see...
  • Page 463 ® Search functions R&S Search setup The toolbar assist opens. 3. Tap the diagram with the waveform to be searched, or drag a rectangle on the dia- gram to define the search area. 4. Alternatively, use the settings provided in the toolbar assist. The default edge search is configured as "Search<x>"...

  • Page 464: Search Gate

    ® Search functions R&S Search gate 11.3 Search gate The gate defines the search area within the source waveform. You can use absolute or relative values to define the gate, or couple it to a previously defined zoom area. 11.3.1 Gate settings Access: "Menu"...
  • Page 465 ® Search functions R&S Search gate Remote command: on page 1450 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:MODE on page 1424 MEASurement<m>:GATE:MODE on page 1508 SEARch:GATE:MODE (Relative) Start Defines the starting value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1450 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1451 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1424 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1424 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STARt...

  • Page 466: Defining The Search Gate

    ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation If several cursor measurements are enabled, select the cursor set to be used for gat- ing. The "Start" and "Stop" values of the gate are adjusted to the values of the cursor line positions. The measurement is limited to the part of the waveform between the cur- sor lines.
  • Page 467 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation The following settings configure the layout of the result table in the "Search Results" box and the size and position of the search zoom window. The result tables can be sor- ted by x-position or value. You can define a maximum number of table entries. Show result table Displays or hides the search result table.

  • Page 468: Display Zoom Settings

    ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation Remote command: on page 1515 SEARch:RESult:SORT:ASCending Clear results Clears the search results once and starts a new search. Remote command: on page 1481 SEARch:CLEar Auto clear If "Auto clear" is enabled, the instrument displays the search results of the last acquisi- tion.
  • Page 469 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation Remote command: on page 1513 SEARch:RESDiagram:SHOW Y mode Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the y-axis values. Remote command: on page 1323 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:MODE on page 1514 SEARch:RESDiagram:VERT:MODE Y position Defines the y-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.

  • Page 470: Configuring The Search Results Presentation

    ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation 11.4.3 Configuring the search results presentation Initially, the "Search Results" box is displayed in front of the other diagrams or as result icon on the signal bar. This depends on the default setting in the "Diagram Layout" tab. Alternatively, you can display it in its own area on the screen, like any other diagram.

  • Page 471: Data And File Management

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 12 Data and file management This chapter describes how to manage instrument settings, and measurement results like waveform data, numeric results and screenshots. The "Save/Recall" dialog provides functions for saving and restoring data on the instru- ment.
  • Page 472 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Figure 12-1: Save tab Access to load instrument settings: "Menu" key > "Save/Recall" key > "Recall" tab > "User settings" Figure 12-2: Recall tab User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 473: Savesets

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings The R&S RTP provides the following types of saving and restoring settings: ● Savesets contain the complete instrument and measurement configuration except for user-specific display settings. ● One File contains the saveset and active reference waveform files in a ZIP file. ●...

  • Page 474: One File

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Save to file Enter the file name to save the setting data to, and select the file format with the format button on the right. Double-tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box. See also: Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog",...
  • Page 475 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings the instrument settings, make sure to create a reference waveform from the channel waveform before you save the One File. The waveform generator/pattern generator and the pulse source state is saved as "Off".

  • Page 476: User Preferences

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Load from file Select "Open" to open the file selection dialog box, and to select the required file. See also: Chapter 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 509. By default, one file names have the prefix "OneFile_". Remote command: on page 1525 SAVeset:ONEFile:NAME...

  • Page 477: Saveset With Preview Function

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings By default, user preference file names have the prefix "UserPreferences_". "Save" Saves the data to the selected file. "Save As..." Opens the file selection dialog box and saves the data to the selected file.

  • Page 478: Saving And Loading Settings

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 1. On the toolbar, tap the "Saveset with preview " icon. A window opens and shows the screenshot of the first measurement configuration that is stored in the default directory. 2.
  • Page 479 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings To save settings to a saveset file Alternatively, you can add the " Save settings" icon to the toolbar and use the icon to store the saveset file to the folder and file specified in the "Settings" tab. See also Chapter 3.3.6.2, "Configuring the toolbar",...

  • Page 480: Save And Recall Waveform Data And Results

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Tap "Open" to navigate to a different file. Select the file from the file selection dialog box and tap "Select". The saved settings and reference waveforms are loaded to the R&S RTP. 12.2 Save and recall waveform data and results Access: "Menu"...

  • Page 481: Waveform Export Files

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results 12.2.1 Waveform export files Waveforms can be stored in XML, CSV, or BIN format. Reloading waveforms: Restrictions To reload waveform data as a reference waveform, it must be stored in BIN format. If multiple acquisitions of one waveform are exported (Data logging or Multiple wave- forms), only the first acquisition can be reloaded.
  • Page 482 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description Resolution Time between two samples Resolution = 1 / Sample Rate SignalResolution Time between two samples in this waveform. The value can differ from Resolution if the source is, for example, a spectrum, a bus signal, a cor- relation or a measurement.
  • Page 483 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description LeadingSettlingSamples Relevant only for BIN files. In XML and CSV files, the value is 0. Number of additional samples before the beginning of waveform sam- ples.
  • Page 484 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description Multi channel export The header files contain strings like this: MultiChannelVerticalOffset: 4:1.63:1.96:0:0:1e-005:0:-1e+026:1e+026:1e-005:10:0:V:. Only the first 5 values and the unit at the end of the string are relevant for data analysis. All other values are for internal use and not explained here.
  • Page 485 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description ResolutionBW Resolution bandwidth of the spectrum AdjustedResolutionBW Actual resolution bandwidth of a spectrum waveform. The value is only valid if the exported waveform is a spectrum. GateRBWCoupling Indication whether the record length or the resolution bandwidth is a con- stant for the spectrum computation...
  • Page 486 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results ;Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; ... ● Multi-channel, single acquisition export In the example, two channels are exported. –...
  • Page 487 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results <value 2> <value ...> In BIN files, the instrument writes some leading and trailing settling samples before and after the waveform data. They ensure that the analysis of the reloaded reference wave- form returns the same results as analysis of the original waveform.

  • Page 488: Waveform Settings

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results 12.2.2 Waveform settings In the "Save - Waveform" dialog, the storage settings for waveform data are defined. See also: Chapter 12.2.6, "Saving and loading waveform data", on page 500. 12.2.2.1 Waveform setup settings Access: "Menu"...
  • Page 489 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results If the MSO option R&S RTP-B1 is installed, you can save also digital channels and parallel buses. Remote command: on page 1527 EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce Selected sources Select the channels to be included in data export if "Multi channel" is enabled. Wave- form1 of up to four input channels can be saved into one file.
  • Page 490 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Data conversion: To convert INT8 or INT16 data to physical quantities, e.g. voltages, use the following formulas: ConversionFactor = VerticalScale * VerticalDivisionCount / NofQuantisationLevels PhysicalQuantity = (Value_ADC * ConversionFactor) + VerticalOffset - (VerticalScale * VerticalPosition) The raw values are written in the *.Wfm.* file, all other values can be found in the corresponding header file.
  • Page 491 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results ".bin/.xml/.csv" Selects the file format. Note that reference waveforms can be loaded from .bin files only. See also: Chapter 12.2.1, "Waveform export files", on page 481. Remote command: on page 1530 EXPort:WAVeform:NAME on page 1530...
  • Page 492 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results You can also select the format of the time stamp in the "Acquire" > "History" dialog. Remote command: on page 1533 EXPort:WAVeform:TIMestamps Multiple acquisitions in one file If enabled, allows you to save several or all history waveforms.

  • Page 493: Histogram

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results In this dialog, you can configure the export of the data of a running Nx Single acquisi- tion. Select the channels and scope in the "Setup" tab. Enable Enables the export of all waveforms of an Nx Single acquisition into one file.
  • Page 494 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results The waveform histogram export saves data in two files. The *.Wfm.* file contains 256 or 512 absolute or relative histogram values. The other file is the header file. Contents of the header file: ●...

  • Page 495: Results

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results The histograms settings are defined in the "Histogram" dialog box ("Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Histogram"). See also: Chapter 8.2.8.4, "Histogram setup", on page 379. Select Selects the histogram to be exported.
  • Page 496 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Access: "Menu" key >"Save/Recall" key > "Save" tab > "Results" Access to the tab is available in all tabs where measurement and analysis settings are defined, for example, in the "Measurements Setup", "Cursors Setup", and "Masks Test Definition"...

  • Page 497: Result Plots Analysis

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Export results Enter the filename to save the results to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box. By default, the filename has the prefix "ResultBoxExport_". You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the "Menu"...
  • Page 498 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Long-term measurements: The *.Wfm.* file contains one value or value set for each long-term measurement point. The maximum number of points is defined in the "Horizontal scaling" dialog box. ●...
  • Page 499 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Measurement Selects the measurement to be exported. Remote command: on page 1537 EXPort:MEASurement:SELect Source, Measurement scale Displays the measurement settings source and scale. Export type You can export the result data of the long-term measurement, the measurement histo- gram or the track.

  • Page 500: Saving And Loading Waveform Data

    ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Save to file Enter the filename to save the measurement data to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box. By default, the filename has the prefix "Measurement_". You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the "Autonaming"...
  • Page 501 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results 2. Tap the "Waveform" button. The "Save - Waveform" dialog opens. 3. Select the waveforms to be saved: ● To save one waveform, tap the "Source" icon and select the waveform. ●...

  • Page 502: Screenshots

    ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots 6. Check the filename under "Nx single" and change it, if needed. Usually, autonam- ing is used. 7. Tap "Start export" to start the acquisition and to save the acquired waveform data to the specified file. To load waveform data as a reference waveform To reload waveform data from a previous measurement, the waveform must have been stored as a reference waveform in a BIN file before.

  • Page 503: Screenshot Settings

    ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Example: Reading meta information using the ExifTool. Command: # exif C:\Screenshot_2020-07-14_0_110551.png Result: ExifTool Version Number : 10.20 File Name : Screenshot_2016-07-14_0_110551.png Directory : C:/ File Size : 37 kB File Modification Date/Time : 2020:07:14 11:05:51+02:00 File Access Date/Time : 2020:07:14 11:05:51+02:00 File Creation Date/Time...
  • Page 504 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Preview........................504 Update.........................504 White background....................... 504 Inverse color........................505 Show setup dialog.......................505 Show only grid......................505 View/ Annotate......................505 Save to file........................505 Preview Shows a preview of the screenshot. The image is created when the dialog box opens. Update Updates the preview of the screenshot with the current display view, e.g.
  • Page 505 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots "White background" "Inverse color" Background Waveform and results Black Inverted colors Black Screen colors Remote command: on page 1541 HCOPy:WBKG Inverse color Inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is shown on a white background. See also: "White background"...

  • Page 506: Configuring And Saving Screenshots

    ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Remote command: on page 1540 HCOPy:DEVice<m>:LANGuage on page 1539 HCOPy:DESTination<1..2> on page 1540 MMEMory:NAME on page 1542 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>[:DUM] on page 1542 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>:NEXT on page 1521 MMEMory:DELete 12.3.2 Configuring and saving screenshots You can edit the image, invert all colors, and set the background color. A preview of the current image is shown for reference.

  • Page 507: Reports

    ® Data and file management R&S Reports 12.4 Reports Reports document the current measurement and test results. The report contains gen- eral information, current vertical and horizontal settings, trigger settings, active chan- nels and all current results except for zoom and search results. A screenshot is also included.
  • Page 508 ® Data and file management R&S Reports Language Selects the language to be used in the report. Available languages are listed in the data sheet. Remote command: on page 1543 REPort:LANGuage Paper size Selects the paper size: A4 or US Letter. Remote command: on page 1543 REPort:PAPersize...

  • Page 509: File Selection Dialog

    ® Data and file management R&S File selection dialog 12.5 File selection dialog The file selection dialog provides a file explorer from which you can select a file to load or to save data to. You can also manage your files in this dialog. Path Tap the path elements to change the current folder.
  • Page 510 ® Data and file management R&S File selection dialog Save, Select Selects the specified file for the open or save operation and closes the dialog box. Cancel Closes the dialog box without selecting a file. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 511: Protocol Analysis

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 13 Protocol analysis Using the serial protocol options for the R&S RTP, you can analyze various serial pro- tocols. ● Basics of protocol analysis..................511 ● I²C (option R&S RTP-K1)..................521 ● SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1)................

  • Page 512: Setup - General Settings

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis ● Search on decoded signal data: For most serial protocols, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, because several event types can be combined. Thus, you get the results for the complete acquisition cycle.

  • Page 513: Autoset For Protocols

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1548 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus. The signal icon of the bus appears on the signal bar.

  • Page 514: Display

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis ● Signals with longer idle phases might not find horizontal adjustment. ● On duplex signals, different forward/reverse amplitudes can fail to determine thresholds. 13.1.3 Display For all protocols, you can select to display the decoded signal as a table and to show the binary signal on the screen.

  • Page 515: Content And Format Of The Ptt File

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Decode results are protocol-specific. They are described in the "Decode Results" chapter of each protocol. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:RESult Show binary For each configured line, the binary signal is also displayed. Data format Sets the data format for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
  • Page 516 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis The PTT file has three types of lines: ● Comment lines begin with a hash character #. A hash character at any other posi- tion in the line is treated like a standard character. ●...

  • Page 517: Shortcuts

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis @PROTOCOL_NAME = i2c Following two lines are equal: 7,01h,Temperature 7,01h, Temperature A comma must be enclosed in double quotes: 7,01h,"Temperature, Pressure, and Volume" A double quote must also be enclosed in double quotes: 7,7Fh,"Highspeed ""Master""...

  • Page 518: Export Protocol Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 13.1.6 Export protocol results In the "Export Protocol Results" dialog, you can export the results and all details of the selected protocol. Include frame timing Includes the frame timing. Remote command: on page 1551 BUS<m>:EXPResult:TIME User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...

  • Page 519: Bit Pattern Editor

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Include details Includes the detailed results for all frames. Remote command: on page 1551 BUS<m>:EXPResult:DETail Export to file Enter the filename to save the results to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box.
  • Page 520 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis The editor displays the pattern in two columns. The left column always shows binary data. For the right column, you can select the format, the default depends on the data specifics. You can edit data in the left or right column. The keypad adapts itself to the column format, only keys appropriate to the format are enabled.

  • Page 521: I²C (Option R&S Rtp-K1)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) 13.2 I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) The Inter-Integrated Circuit is a simple, low-bandwidth, low-speed protocol used for communication between on-board devices. ● The I²C protocol....................521 ● I²C configuration....................523 ● I²C trigger......................526 ●...
  • Page 522 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Figure 13-1: I2C writes access with 7-bit address Address types: 7-bit and 10-bit Slave addresses can be 7 bits or 10 bits long. A 7-bit address requires 1 byte, 7 bits for the address followed by the R/W bit.

  • Page 523: I²C Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) ● Specific data pattern in the message 13.2.2 I²C configuration 13.2.2.1 I²C configuration settings Access: [Protocol] > "Setup" tab > "Protocol" = I2C Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings",...
  • Page 524 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTP-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time. For triggering on a serial bus, analog or digital channel sources are required. Remote command: on page 1554 BUS<m>:I2C:SDA:SOURce...
  • Page 525 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) I2C Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for I C are available in CSV and PTT for- mat. An I C label file contains three values for each address: ●...

  • Page 526: I²C Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) 8. Enable "Decode". 13.2.3 I²C trigger 13.2.3.1 I²C trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. –...
  • Page 527 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Some trigger types have additional settings that can be defined. In this case, the "Define trigger details" button appears next to the "Type" function. Open it for a detailed definition of the trigger conditions. Remote command: on page 1557 TRIGger<m>:I2C:MODE...
  • Page 528 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Address OR ← Trigger type Triggers on one to four address conditions. Each enabled condition requires an exact address. You can specify: For each condition to be used, select "Monitor" ● "OR x" on page 530 ●...
  • Page 529 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) No Ack conditions Selects which missing acknowledge bits is detected if the trigger type is set to "Missing Ack". "Address Nack" No secondary recognizes the address. "Data write Nack" The addressed secondary does not accept the data. "Data read Nack"...
  • Page 530 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Defines the bit pattern of the secondary device address. The length of the entry is adjusted to the selected address type. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...

  • Page 531: I²C Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) "Value min " Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. Enter the bytes in msb first bit order. The maximum pattern length is 64 bit. Waveform data is compared with the pattern byte-by-byte. "Value max "...
  • Page 532 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...

  • Page 533: Search On Decoded I²C Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) 13.2.5 Search on decoded I²C data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data, the same events which you also can trigger on. Before you can start the search, you have to configure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data.
  • Page 534 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) "Repeated Searches for a start condition without previous stop condition. Repea- start" ted start conditions occur when a master exchanges multiple mes- sages with a slave without releasing the bus. "Stop" Searches for the end of the message. The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high.

  • Page 535: Spi Bus (Option R&S Rtp-K1)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Address OR setup: , OR x Address type, Address, R/W bit The address OR setup consists of the monitor, address type, address and an R/W bit. The address OR setup settings are the same as in the I2C trigger setup, see Chap- ter 13.2.3.1, "I²C trigger settings",...

  • Page 536: Spi Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral devices, in particular, for transmission of data streams. Main characteristics of SPI are: ● Master-slave communication ● No device addressing; The slave is accessed by a chip select, or slave select line. ●...
  • Page 537 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 SCLK Defines the settings for the clock line. SCLK source ← SCLK Sets the input channel of the clock line. Waveform 1 of channel signals, math wave- forms, and reference waveforms can be used for decoding.
  • Page 538 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) SS, MISO, MOSI Configures the Slave Select, MISO and MOSI lines. Source ← SS, MISO, MOSI Sets the input channel of the selected line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 539 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) There are several ways to set the threshold: ● "Threshold" Enter the value directly in the field. ● "Autoset" Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. ● "Find thresholds"...
  • Page 540 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset Frame condition Defines the start of a frame. A frame contains a number of successive words, at least one word.

  • Page 541: Spi Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) 13.3.3 SPI trigger 13.3.3.1 SPI trigger Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals.
  • Page 542 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) "MOSI/MISO" Sets the trigger to specified data patterns expected on the MOSI and MISO lines on the same time. Remote command: on page 1591 TRIGger<m>:SPI:MODE MOSI and MISO data conditions The trigger on MOSI and MISO patterns is defined in the same way: Condition ←...

  • Page 543: Spi Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Index min, Index max ← MOSI and MISO data conditions The effect of data positioning depends on the Search mode. It sets the number of bits or words before the first word of interest. These offset bits/words are skipped. If the position operator defines a range, the first and the last bit/word of interest are defined.

  • Page 544: Search On Decoded Spi Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Decode Results Table The "Decode results" table contains information about all decoded frames. Table 13-4: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Frame start Times of frame start and frame end Count Number of words in the frame...
  • Page 545 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Type Sets the event to be searched for. "Frame start Searches for the start of the frame when slave select signal SS (SS)" changes to the active state. This type is available if the slave select line is configured in the bus setup, and the frame condition is "SS".

  • Page 546: Uart/Rs-232/Rs-422/Rs-485 (Option R&S Rtp-K2)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Remote command: on page 1599 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:FCONdition on page 1600 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MISopattern on page 1600 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MOSipattern on page 1600 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOPerator on page 1600 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOSition on page 1601 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPTO on page 1601 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:PALignment 13.3.5.2 SPI search results To get search results, "Enable"...

  • Page 547: Uart Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization. The receiver synchronizes by means of the start and stop bits, and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver. Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals: ●...
  • Page 548 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Source: Tx, Rx Select the input channels for the transmitter and receiver signals. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 549 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Remote command: on page 1608 BUS<m>:UART:POLarity Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second. To select a bit rate from list of prede- fined values, tap the icon beside the "Bit rate" field. To enter a specific value, open the keypad.
  • Page 550 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset Bit order Defines if a word starts with msb (most significant bit) or lsb (least significant bit). The display of the decoded signal considers this setting, results are displayed in the speci- fied order.

  • Page 551: Uart Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) 13.4.2.3 Configuring UART protocol For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.4.2.1, "UART configuration set- tings", on page 547. 1. Press the [Protocol] key on the front panel. 2. At the left-hand side, select the vertical tab of the bus you want to set up. 3.
  • Page 552 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 553 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) "Stop error" Triggers if the stop bit is a logic 0. Remote command: on page 1611 TRIGger<m>:UART:TYPE Trigger source Selects the transmitter or receiver line as trigger source. Remote command: on page 1611 TRIGger<m>:UART:SOURce Data conditions Specify the data conditions if the trigger type is set to "Data".

  • Page 554: Uart Decode Results

    ® R&S Protocol analysis UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) 1. Press the [Protocol] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. Press "Setup trigger". 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4. Select the serial bus that is set to UART. 5.

  • Page 555: Can And Can Fd (Option R&S Rtp-K3/K9)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Column Description State Decoding state of the word. "Insuffcient waveform length" indicates that the word is not completely contained in the acquisition. Change the horizontal scale, or move the reference point to the left to get a longer acquisition.

  • Page 556: Can And Can Fd Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) the CAN FD frame, the first enabling the new frame format with different data length coding and the second optionally switching to a faster bit rate after the arbitration is decided.
  • Page 557 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Figure 13-7: Configuration for CAN See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1548 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus.
  • Page 558 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) A math waveform can be used, for example, if you probe on CAN-High and CAN-Low using two single-ended probes, and the difference between high and low is calculated and displayed using a math waveform. Remote command: on page 1615 BUS<m>:CAN:DATA:SOURce...
  • Page 559 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Note: If the sources are digital channels, the same threshold values are used for the parallel and the serial buses. You can set the thresholds either in the parallel bus con- figuration or in the serial bus configuration.
  • Page 560 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The CAN bus interface uses an asynchronous transmission scheme. The standard specifies a set of rules to resynchronize the local clock of a CAN node to the message. The sample point divides the nominal bit period into two distinct time segments. The length of the time segments is defined in time quanta according to network and node conditions during CAN development.
  • Page 561 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Time segment1, Time segment2 Set the number of time quanta before the sample point (Time segment 1) and after the sample point (Time segment 2). The "Sample point" percentage value is adjusted accordingly. Time segments 1 comprises the segments Synch_seg, Prop_seg, and Phase_seg1 which are specified in the CAN standard.
  • Page 562 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "PetrolLevel", starts at bit #24, has a length of 8 bit, and the unit is liter. The signal "IdleRunning" is state-encoded. It has only one bit. The binary value 0 means "Run- ning", and the binary value 1 means "Idle".

  • Page 563: Can / Can Fd Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 13.5.3 CAN / CAN FD trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on various events in a CAN or CAN FD frame. Trigger condi- tions include start of frame, frame ID, data pattern, or error conditions. 13.5.3.1 Trigger settings Access: [Protocol] >...
  • Page 564 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Trigger type Selects the trigger type for CAN analysis. "Start of frame" Triggers on the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization bit). "Frame type" Triggers on a specified frame type (data, remote, error, or overload). For data and remote frames, also the identifier format is considered.
  • Page 565 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Identifier + Data" Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition. The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier"...
  • Page 566 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Symbolic" The "Symbolic" trigger type is available if a DBC label list file is loa- ded and applied. It allows you to trigger on a specific data message, or a signal and its value that appears inside the message, see Chap- ter 13.5.6.1, "Symbolic trigger",...
  • Page 567 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Any" The ID type and ID pattern are not relevant for the trigger condition. If the trigger type is "Identifier", the instrument triggers on any identi- fier in the specified frame type. If the trigger type is "Identifier + Data", set the "ID type"...
  • Page 568 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Data setup: DLC, NDB, Transfer, Condition, Data min, Data max The data setup consists of the transfer direction, the number of bytes, the condition, and one or two data patterns. To trigger only on data, set the "ID type"...
  • Page 569 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Data position The data position sets the location in the data field where the instrument looks for the specified data pattern. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTP-K9. The position can be defined if the data field of the frame is longer than 8 bytes - if DLC ≥9.
  • Page 570 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) on page 1627 TRIGger<m>:CAN:ACKerror on page 1628 TRIGger<m>:CAN:FDATa:SCERror 13.5.3.2 Triggering on CAN FD data The "Identifier + Data" trigger type supports triggering on data bytes of specific value at specific location in the data field of a frame.

  • Page 571: Can And Can Fd Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The instrument skips the first 3 data bytes and starts comparing the data pattern with the 4th data byte. So, the byte with value 17 can be found between the 11th and the 19th data byte.

  • Page 572: Search On Decoded Can Or Can Fd Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Table 13-7: Content of the Details frame table Column Description Standard Frame format, CAN or CAN FD. Label Symbolic label name defined in the label list Data length code, coded number of data bytes Actual number of data bytes Data Value of the data frame.
  • Page 573 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Start of frame" Searches for the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization bit). "Frame type" Searches for a specified frame type (data, remote, error, or overload). For data and remote frames, also the identifier format is considered. For details, see: ●...
  • Page 574 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1637 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN[:SSOFrame] on page 1638 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SFTYpe on page 1638 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SFIDentifier on page 1638 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SIDData on page 1638 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SERRor on page 1654 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SSYMbolic Standard Selects the CAN standard: "CAN", "CAN FD", or "Any". The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTP-K9.
  • Page 575 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) FD bits For standard settings " CAN FD" and "Any", you can search for CAN FD-specific bits. For details, see "FD bits" on page 567. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTP-K9. Remote command: on page 1645 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:FDATa[:FDF]...
  • Page 576 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) on page 1643 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:ACKerror on page 1644 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:FDATa:SCERror 13.5.5.2 Search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 577: Symbolic Trigger, Decode And Search

    ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) bytes to define the pattern. For data fields longer than 8 byte, you can define the posi- tion where the specified pattern starts. The following example demonstrates how the data pattern and data position is defined. To set up the search 1.
  • Page 578 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The "Frame type" is automatically set to "Data", and the "Identifier" is shown for infor- mation. Specific settings for the symbolic trigger are: Message........................578 Signal trigger....................... 578 Signal.......................... 578 Condition........................
  • Page 579 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same signal if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.
  • Page 580 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) If a DBC file is applied, the symbolic search for messages and signal, which are defined in the DBC file, is available. Symbolic search is an alternative to the other search criteria, you can either search for symbolic values or for an AND-combination of the other 5 criteria.
  • Page 581 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Signal Sets the signal name to be triggered or searched for. The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same signal if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.

  • Page 582: Lin (Option R&S Rtp-K3)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) 13.6 LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is a simple, low-cost bus system used within automotive network architectures. LIN is usually a subnetwork of a CAN bus. The pri- mary purpose of LIN is the integration of uncritical sensors and actuators with low- bandwidth requirements.

  • Page 583: Lin Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Figure 13-8: LIN frame with header and response The data is transmitted in bytes using the UART byte-word interface without the parity bit. Each byte consists of a start bit, 8 bits and a stop bit. Figure 13-9: Structure of a byte field Data bytes are transmitted LSB first.
  • Page 584 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 LIN standard Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT. The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding.
  • Page 585 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Threshold Sets the threshold value for digitization of the signal. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is consid- ered low if the signal value is below the threshold.
  • Page 586 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. LIN Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for LIN are available in CSV and PTT for- mat. You can also apply an existing LIN description file. A LIN label file contains two values for each identifier: ●...
  • Page 587 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Nodes { Master: Master1, 10 ms, 0.1 ms; Slaves: Slave_Motor, Slave_Sensor; Signals { Sensor1:1,0x0,Slave_Sensor, Master1; Temperature1:12,0,Slave_Sensor, Master1; Frames { Sensor_Frame: {Error,30; Temperature, 20; Status, 0;} Master_Frame: {Error,15; Speed, 10;} Schedule_tables { Sensor_Frame delay 10.000 ms; Master_Frame delay 15.000 ms;...

  • Page 588: Lin Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) 2. At the left hand-side, select the vertical tab of the bus you want to set up. 3. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 4.
  • Page 589 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) "Identifier" Sets the trigger to one specific identifier or an identifier range. Enter only the 6-bit identifier without parity bits, not the protected identifier. Description of trigger type specific settings: "Identifier setup: Condi- tion, Frame ID min, Frame ID max"...
  • Page 590 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) "Identifier + Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition. The Data" instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier" trigger type, see Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max.
  • Page 591 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Identifier OR setup: Monitor, Frame ID Sets the trigger to a combination of up to four identifiers. Enter the patterns in the "Frame ID" fields. In binary and hex format, characters 1, 0, and X (do not care) are allowed.

  • Page 592: Lin Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Error conditions Triggers if one or more of the following errors occur: ● Checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transmission. It is the last byte of the frame response. The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier (PID).
  • Page 593 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings. The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display.

  • Page 594: Search On Decoded Lin Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Tools Press "Display settings" in the "Deode Reults" table, to access the "Display" tab. Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 22.17.7.3, "Decode results", on page 1665. 13.6.5 Search on decoded LIN data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data, the same events which you also can trigger on.
  • Page 595 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) "Identifier + Searches for a combination of identifier and data condition. The Data" instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier" trigger type, see "Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max"...
  • Page 596 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Remote command: on page 1675 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:IDOR<m>:ENABle on page 1675 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:IDOR<m>[:VALue] Error Condition Selects the error type to be searched for. You can select one or more error types as search condition. The error types are the same as in the LIN trigger setup, see "Error conditions"...

  • Page 597: Option R&S Rtp-K6)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) ● on page 1684 SEARch:RESult:LIN:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:STATe? ● on page 1685 SEARch:RESult:LIN:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue? 13.7 MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 13.7.1 The MIL-STD-1553 The MIL-STD-1553 specification defines the characteristics of a serial data bus origi- nally designed for use in the military avionics. Nowadays it is also used in spacecraft on-board data handling.
  • Page 598 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) ● Data Word Count /Mode Code: indicates the number of words that are sent/ received by the RT. A maximum of 32 words is allowed. This field may be used for the transmission of the mode code value. ●...

  • Page 599: Mil-Std-1553 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) ● Instrumentation: helps to distinguish between a status word and a command word. The logic state of this bit shall be 0. ● Service Request: indicates that the RT requires service. A logic 1 indicates a pres- ence of a service request and logic 0 indicates its absence.
  • Page 600 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Source Sets the source of the selected data line. Waveform 1 of channel signals, math wave- forms, and reference waveforms can be used. For triggering on a serial bus, a channel signal is required.
  • Page 601 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Threshold Upper and lower threshold levels. You can enter the values directly in high" and the fields. "Threshold low" "Find thresh- Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresh- olds" olds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude.
  • Page 602 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 13.7.2.2 Display settings Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. MIL Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. A MIL-STD-1553 label file contains four values for each identifier: ●...

  • Page 603: Mil-Std-1553 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 13.7.3 MIL-STD-1553 trigger 13.7.3.1 Trigger settings MIL-STD-1553 Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals.
  • Page 604 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Data Word" Triggers on a specified data word or data word range. "Command/ Status Word" Triggers on a specified command word or on a status word. "Command Word" Triggers on a specified command word. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 605 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Status Word" Triggers on a specified status word. "Error Condi- Triggers on any combination of protocol errors. tion" Remote command: on page 1689 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:TYPE Sync Type / Word Type Triggers on a sync impulse or word type. You can select to trigger on "Command/ Status", on "All"...
  • Page 606 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "RTA Min/ Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. RTA" "RTA Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range".
  • Page 607 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote command: on page 1694 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:ICONdition on page 1694 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:IMAX on page 1694 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:IMIN 11-Bit Information The 11-Bit information sets bits 9 to 19 if there is a command or status word. The 11-Bit information consists of the condition and one or two 11-Bit information patterns.
  • Page 608 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Word Count Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 1690 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CCONdition on page 1691 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMAX on page 1691 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMIN T/R (Transmit/receive) Toggles the data direction of the selected command: 1 (transmit), 0 (receive), or X (either).
  • Page 609 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Check min gap ← Error Condition Checks and sets a value for the intermessage gap between the last bit of a message and the following command word sync. The time is measured between the mid bit zero crossings.

  • Page 610: Mil-Std-1553 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 13.7.4 MIL-STD-1553 decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Setup" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...
  • Page 611 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) To search on decoded data, set the search "Source" to the serial bus that is configured for the protocol to be analyzed. See also Chapter 11, "Search functions", on page 448. 13.7.5.1 MIL search setup Access: [Protocol] >...
  • Page 612 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote terminal address setup: Condition, RTA The remote terminal address setup consists of the condition and one or two RTA pat- terns. The RTA setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup, see "Remote Termi- nal Address"...
  • Page 613 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Subaddress / Mode setup: Condition, Subaddress min, Subaddress max The subaddress/mode setup consists of the condition and one or two subaddress/ mode patterns. The subaddress/mode setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup, see "Subaddress/ Mode"...

  • Page 614: Arinc 429 (Option R&S Rtp-K7)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Remote command: on page 1706 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:MANChester on page 1706 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:PARity on page 1706 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:SYNC on page 1706 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:TIMing 13.7.5.2 MIL search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.

  • Page 615: Arinc 429 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Word Format Figure 13-13: Structure of an ARINC 429 word An ARINC 429 word is 32-bits and consists of the following parts (see Figure 13-13): ● Parity: the most significant bit (MSB). Checks if there are bit errors during the trans- mission.
  • Page 616 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Data Sets the source of the selected data line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are only available if the trigger source is one of the input channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 617 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) ● "Find thresholds" Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude. Remote command: on page 1713 BUS<m>:ARINc:THReshold:HIGH on page 1713 BUS<m>:ARINc:THReshold:LOW on page 1713 BUS<m>:ARINc:PRESet...
  • Page 618 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) ARINC 429 Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. An ARINC 429 label file contains two values for each identifier: ● "Arinc Label": the ARINC 429 label value, that identifies the data type and the parameters associated with it.

  • Page 619: Arinc 429 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) 9. Enable "Decode". 13.8.3 ARINC 429 trigger 13.8.3.1 ARINC 429 trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol"...
  • Page 620 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) "Label + Data" Sets the trigger on a defined word format. You can define the label, the data and the SDI / SSM bits separately, see "Label + Data" on page 620. "Error Condition"...
  • Page 621 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) "Label Min" Defines the bit pattern of the label. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 519.

  • Page 622: Arinc 429 Label List

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Timing: Min gap, Max gap ← Error Conditions Defines the idle time between two words, which is needed for word synchronization. The beginning of the first bit after the gap marks the start of a new word. You can define a minimum idle time "Min gap", and/or a maximum time "Max gap".

  • Page 623: Arinc 429 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Labels for ARINC 429 protocol Column order: Arinc Label, Symbolic Label # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ----Definition---- 001o, Distance to Go 002o, Time to Go 010o, Present Position - Latitude 011o, Present Position - Longitude 014o, Magnetic Heading 015o, Wind Speed...

  • Page 624: Search On Decoded Arinc 429 Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Table 13-11: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame. Start Time of word start in relation to the trigger point Stop Time of word stop in relation to the trigger point Label The value of the label bytes The state of the SDI bits...
  • Page 625 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Type The search criterion is defined by "Type". All trigger types are also available for search. Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". "Word Start" Searches for the start word. "Word Stop"...
  • Page 626 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) The SDI / SSM setup settings are the same as in the ARINC trigger setup, see "SDI / SSM" on page 621. Remote command: on page 1722 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:SDI on page 1723 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:SSM Error Condition Selects the error type to be searched for.

  • Page 627: Ethernet 10Base-T And 100Base-Tx (Option R&S Rtp-K8)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 13.9 Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Twisted-pair Ethernet technologies are based on the family of standards IEEE 802.3, issued by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). R&S RTP-K8 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTP to analyze Ethernet pro- tocol variants 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, by decoding the signal and searching within the decoded events.
  • Page 628 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1548 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus. The signal icon of the bus appears on the signal bar.
  • Page 629 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1727 BUS<m>:ETHernet:VARiant Source Defines the source settings for the data signal. Permitted source selections are the analog, mathematical, and reference channels. As soon as the serial bus trigger has been selected, the only permitted source selec- tions are the analog channels "C1"...
  • Page 630 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Show thresholds If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:THReshold 13.9.2.2 Ethernet display settings Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514.
  • Page 631 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) # xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx/yy support other length headers # yy should be the header length in decimal # yy should be between 24 - 48 # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 00:00:0C, Cisco 00:01:13, Olympus 00:01:14, KandaTsu 00:04:07, TopconPo 00:0B:64, KiebackP...

  • Page 632: Ethernet Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 13.9.2.3 Configuring Ethernet signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the active states and the logical thresholds. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.9.2.1, "Ethernet configuration set- tings", on page 627.
  • Page 633 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 634 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) "Adv error" Triggers on any selected errors. Remote command: on page 1730 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:TYPE Ethernet Variant Defines the Ethernet protocol variant and transmission speed. "10BASE-T" Selects the Ethernet protocol variant 10BASE-T (standard data rate 10 Mbit/s).
  • Page 635 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) "Bit index oper- Sets the operator ("Equal", "Greater or equal", or "In range"). ator" Sets the bit index (data position), or the start value of a bit index "Bit index" range.
  • Page 636 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Frame check Defines the frame check sequence value. "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "Frame check Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. (Min)"...

  • Page 637: Ethernet Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 13.9.4 Ethernet decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Setup" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...

  • Page 638: Search On Decoded Ethernet Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Column Description Destination Symbol Translation (or symbolic label) of the destination address, if the label list is enabled. Source Symbol Translation (or symbolic label) of the source address, if the label list is enabled. Number of Words Number of words in the frame Bit rate...
  • Page 639 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Type Define the event types to be searched. Available event types are "Frame" and "Error". Remote command: on page 1741 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:SELect on page 1745 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:ERRor:SELect Frame Searches for the following frame conditions: "Destination address", "Source address", "Length/Type", or "Frame check".
  • Page 640 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1742 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:SCONdition on page 1742 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:SMIN on page 1743 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:SMAX Length/Type ← Frame To search for a frame length or frame type, a type/length pattern or optionally a range of type/length patterns have to be specified.
  • Page 641 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 13.9.5.2 Ethernet search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 642: Ethernet 100Base-T1 (Option R&S Rtp-57)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) 6. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs an Ethernet decode according to the thresholds and proto- col settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1). 7.

  • Page 643: 100Base-T1 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) the PHY sublayers, i.e. Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) and Physical Medium Attach- ment (PMA) sublayer as follows: ● Adopts full duplex communication of 1000BASE-T and therefore echo cancellation on a single twisted-pair channel. This feature reduces cabling while preserving the Ethernet MAC compatibility ●...
  • Page 644 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Forward Defines the forward signal settings. You can choose between a differential and single-ended signal and set the forward source channel for the waveform. Only analog channels are available for selection. Remote command: on page 1752 BUS<m>:HBTO:FTYP...
  • Page 645 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Reverse attenuation Sets the attenuation factor. It is used to de-amplify the reverse signal before subtract- ing it from the forward signal. The effective signal amplitude passed to the decoder is: Remote command: on page 1751 BUS<m>:HBTO:ATTN...
  • Page 646 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Symbol rate Defines the transmission rate of ternary symbols which is by default 66.67 MSymb/s. This parameter should be rarely changed. Remote command: on page 1754 BUS<m>:HBTO:SYMRate Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset...
  • Page 647 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) 100BASE-T1 Specific Symbol Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for 100BASE-T1 are available in CSV and PTT format. A 100BASE-T1 label file contains two values for each ethernet header: ● Ethernet Header Display ●...

  • Page 648: 100Base-T1 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) 13.10.3 100BASE-T1 trigger 13.10.3.1 100BASE-T1 trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup.
  • Page 649 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) ● Destination address ● Source address ● Length/Type ● Frame check ● Data ● Index The frame contains addresses of the devices and MAC control information that define how to go about transmitting and receiving frames. IDLE ←...
  • Page 650 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be triggered on. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The destination address corresponds to the address of the interface in the device that receives the frame.
  • Page 651 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) "Data Max" The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 1756 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:CONDition on page 1756 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:MIN on page 1757 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:MAX Length/Type Sets the specified Length/Type to be triggered on.
  • Page 652 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Remote command: on page 1758 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:CRC:CONDition on page 1758 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:CRC:MIN on page 1758 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:CRC:MAX Data Sets the specified data to be triggered on. The data setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.

  • Page 653: 100Base-T1 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) CRC Error ← Errors Triggers on a frame that has a mismatch of the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) value between the transmitting and receiving device. Remote command: on page 1761 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:ERRor:CRC SFD Error ←...
  • Page 654 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...

  • Page 655: Search On Decoded 100Base-T1 Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 22.17.11.3, "Decode results", on page 1761. 13.10.5 Search on decoded 100BASE-T1 data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 656 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) The frame contains addresses of the devices and MAC control information that define how to go about transmitting and receiving frames. FILLER ← Type Searches for a Filler frame. The frame is used to maintain transmission activity. IDLE ←...
  • Page 657 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Remote command: on page 1769 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:SADDress:CONDition on page 1770 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:SADDress:MIN on page 1770 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:SADDress:MAX Length/Type Sets the specified Length/Type to be searched for. The Length/Type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The value in this field indicates the manner in which the field is being used, either as a length or type field.
  • Page 658 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) Data Sets the specified data to be searched for. The data setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range.
  • Page 659 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-57) SFD Error ← Errors Searches for a frame with invalid Start Frame Delimiter (SFD). Remote command: on page 1775 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 13.10.5.2 100BASE-T1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.

  • Page 660: Ethernet 1000Base-T1 (Option R&S Rtp-K58)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 463. 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to 100BASE-T1 (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected).

  • Page 661: 1000Base-T1 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) ● Adopts Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM-3) encoding scheme with the following encoding techniques: – PAM-3 is transmitted at 750 MB data rate. – It uses 15-bit scrambler to improve the EMC performance. –...
  • Page 662 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Forward Defines the forward signal settings. You can choose between a differential and single-ended signal and set the source channel for the waveform. Only analog channels are available for selection. Remote command: on page 1781 BUS<m>:TBTO:FTYP on page 1781...
  • Page 663 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset 13.11.2.2 1000BASE-T1 display settings Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. To enhance the decode possibilities of the 1000BASE-T1 protocol, you can use an additional setting in the "Display"...

  • Page 664: 1000Base-T1 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display. "Off"...
  • Page 665 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 666 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) IDLE ← Type Triggers on an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Triggers on the specified error frame. Trigger level Sets the trigger level. Remote command: on page 1790 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:TRGLevel Destination address...
  • Page 667 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Remote command: on page 1792 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:CONDition on page 1792 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:MIN on page 1792 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:MAX Source address Sets the specified source address to be triggered on. The source address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The source address is the physical address of the device that sends the frame.
  • Page 668 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Frame check Sets the specified frame check to be triggered on. The frame check setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. This field contains a value that is used to check the integrity of the various bits in the frame fields (excluding the preamble / SFD).
  • Page 669 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) "Index Max" The second index pattern is required to specify a range with condi- tions "In range". Remote command: on page 1794 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:ICONdition on page 1794 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:IMIN on page 1794 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:IMAX Errors Sets the type of error events to be triggered on.

  • Page 670: 1000Base-T1 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 13.11.3.2 Triggering on 1000BASE-T1 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 1000BASE-T1 signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.

  • Page 671: Search On Decoded 1000Base-T1 Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results" table. Table 13-15: Content of the Decode results table Column Description...
  • Page 672 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) For general information on how to handle the search functionality, see Chapter 11, "Search functions", on page 448. 13.11.5.1 1000BASE-T1 search setup Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup search" Search criteria Use the "Search criteria"...
  • Page 673 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) IDLE ← Type Searches for an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Searches for the specified error frame. Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be searched for. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
  • Page 674 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Source address Sets the specified source address to be searched for. The source address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The source address is the physical address of the device that sends the frame. "Condition"...
  • Page 675 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific frame check, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the frame check pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...
  • Page 676 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Remote command: on page 1801 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:ICONdition on page 1802 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:IMIN on page 1801 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:IMAX Errors Sets the type of error events to be searched for. RS-FEC error ← Errors Searches for RS-FEC errors. Remote command: on page 1802 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:ERRor:FEC...
  • Page 677 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 13.11.5.2 1000BASE-T1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 678: Rffe (Option R&S Rtp-K40)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) 5. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 13.11.5, "Search on decoded 1000BASE-T1 data", on page 671. 6. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs an 1000BASE-T1 decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).
  • Page 679 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) External VIO supply Master Slave 1 (RFIC) (FEM 1) Slave 2 (FEM 2) Slave n (FEM n) Figure 13-14: RFFE bus structure with external VIO supply Command sequences Protocol messages are called command sequences in RFFE. The standard defines various command sequences to accomplish read and write access to slaves and to non-active masters.

  • Page 680: Rffe Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Command frame Address and data frames Command payload [Address frames] [Data frames] 4 bits 8 bits + P 8 bits + P 8 bits + P Figure 13-15: General structure of a RFFE Write command sequence Command frame Address and data frames Command payload...
  • Page 681 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Version Selects the RFFE version. Supported are 1.x, 2.0, and 2.1. Remote command: on page 1816 BUS<m>:RFFE:VERSion...
  • Page 682 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1812 BUS<m>:RFFE:CLOCk:SOURce SDATA Source Sets the source of the data line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 683 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset Glitch filter Enables the glitch filter on the SCLK and SDATA lines to improve decode accuracy. The "Glitch filter width"...

  • Page 684: Rffe Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) 6. Tap the "SCLK" button, and select the waveform of the clock line. 7. Tap the "SDATA" button, and select the waveform of the data line. 8. Set the logical thresholds. 9. If the signal has glitches which can distort the decoding, enable the glitch filter. Set the glitch width.
  • Page 685 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1816 BUS<m>:RFFE:VERSion Type Selects the trigger type for RFFE analysis. The instrument triggers always at the end of the met trigger criteria. Remote command: on page 1817 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:TYPE Sequence Start ←...
  • Page 686 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Register Read ← Type Triggers on "Register Read" command sequences. This sequence sends the register address in the command payload, and reads back one data frame. You can refine the trigger condition using the same settings as for the "Register Write" command sequence, see "Register Write"...
  • Page 687 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) You can refine the trigger condition: ● Set a slave address condition to trigger only on command sequences that are sent to the specified MIDs. See: "Slave Addr. /MID " on page 689 ●...
  • Page 688 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Triggers on "Master Read" command sequences. This sequence sends the register address in the command payload, and reads two data frames. You can refine the trigger condition: ● Set a MID condition to trigger only on command sequences that are sent to the specified MIDs.
  • Page 689 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "SSC error" Triggers when no valid SSC sequence has been found after the idle time. The instrument triggers at the invalid sequence. "Length error" Triggers on an incorrect length of the command sequence - when additional or missing bits are detected and the sequence of bits is not as expected.
  • Page 690 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Address Defines the register address pattern for all operators that require one (Min)" pattern. "Adress (Max)" Defines the second address pattern that is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 1819 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:ADDRess:CONDition...
  • Page 691 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) To trigger on any data byte that fulfills the data pattern settings, set the index to XX. "Condition" Sets the operator to trigger on a specific data frame ("Equal") or a data frame range. "Data (Min)"...

  • Page 692: Rffe Label List

    ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) 13.12.4 RFFE label list Label lists are protocol-specific. A label list file for RFFE contains slave addresses and/or register addresses and their symbolic names: ● "SA": slave address (SID in the labal list file) ●...
  • Page 693 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings. The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display.

  • Page 694: Search On Decoded Rffe Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Column Description State Overall state of the frame. "Insuffcient waveform length" indicates that the frame is not completely contained in the acquisition. Change the horizontal scale, or move the reference point to the left to get a longer acquisition.
  • Page 695 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". For details, see also "Type" on page 685. "Sequence Start" Searches for SSC. Additional search parameter: "Slave Addr." on page 696 "Sequence Stop" Searches for bus park at the end of a command sequence.
  • Page 696 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Master Read" Searches for Master Read command sequences. Additional search parameters: ● Address of the non-BOM master, see "Slave Addr." on page 696. ● Register address, see "Address" on page 697. ● Data pattern that is returned by the non-BOM master, see "Data"...
  • Page 697 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1835 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:BCOunt:CONDition on page 1836 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:BCOunt:MIN on page 1836 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:BCOunt:MAX Address Searches for a register address or an address range. The register address settings are the same as in the RFFE trigger setup, see "Address"...
  • Page 698 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) on page 1838 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:GAP on page 1838 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:VERSion 13.12.6.2 RFFE search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 699: D-Phy (Ption R&S Rtp-K42)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) 6. To refine the search settings, configure additional settings, which are available for many search types. For details, see Chapter 13.12.6.1, "RFFE search setup", on page 694. 7. Under "Control", "Enable" the search. The "Search Results"...

  • Page 700: D-Phy Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) 13.13.2 D-PHY configuration 13.13.2.1 D-PHY configuration settings Access: [Protocol] key > "Setup" tab > "Protocol = D-PHY" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Variant...
  • Page 701 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Source Connection Defines the source and the type of probe used for the respective lane. Permitted source selections are none, the analog, mathematical, and reference chan- nels. CP ← Source Connection Sets the source of the clock lane. Remote command: on page 1844 BUS<m>:DPHY:CP:SOURce...
  • Page 702 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1847 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPZero:HSPeed:THReshold on page 1847 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPONe:HSPeed:THReshold on page 1847 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTWo:HSPeed:THReshold on page 1847 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTHree:HSPeed:THReshold Set thresholds Opens a dialog to set the threshold values. HS Hysteresis ← Set thresholds Sets a value for the hysteresis of the respective lane.
  • Page 703 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.

  • Page 704: D-Phy Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) 13.13.3 D-PHY trigger 13.13.3.1 D-PHY trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected USB protocol type and trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup.
  • Page 705 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1548 BUS<m>:TYPE Type Selects the trigger type for the D-PHY analysis. Remote command: on page 1849 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:TYPE HS Start of Packet ← Type Sets the trigger to the transmission start of a high-speed packet. HS End of Packet ←...
  • Page 706 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) LP Escape Mode ← Type Sets the trigger to an escape mode event. LP Lane Turnaround ← Type Sets the trigger to a low-power turnaround, a reversion of the transmission direction. LP HS Request ← Type Sets the trigger to a high-speed request.
  • Page 707 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Virtual Channel Triggers on a specific virtual channel, an independent data stream for up to four periph- erals. Remote command: on page 1854 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:HSVC Data Type Sets the specified data type to be triggered on. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
  • Page 708 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) "Data Min/ Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. Data" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out "Data Max" of range". Remote command: For "Type">"HS Data": on page 1849 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:DATA:CONDition...

  • Page 709: D-Phy Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1852 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:CONDition on page 1852 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MAX on page 1852 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MIN 13.13.3.2 Triggering on D-PHY Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the D-PHY signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.

  • Page 710: Search On Decoded D-Phy Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Table 13-19: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Packet Type Packet type Number of virtual channels Data type WC/ Data Word count or data value...
  • Page 711 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) 13.13.5.1 D-PHY search setup Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup search" Type Searches for the selected D-PHY type. Remote command: on page 1861 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:TYPE HS Start of Packet ← Type Searches for a transmission start of a high-speed packet. HS End of Packet ←...
  • Page 712 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) Data Type Searches for a specific data type. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data type ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data type range.
  • Page 713 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) "Data Max" The second data value pattern is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: For "Type">"HS Data": on page 1862 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:DATA:CONDition on page 1862 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:DATA:MAX on page 1862 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:DATA:MIN...
  • Page 714 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (ption R&S RTP-K42) 13.13.5.2 D-PHY search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 715: M-Phy And Usb Ssic (Option R&S Rtp-K44 And K64)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTP displays the "Search Results" box that lists the detected events. For information on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi- gate the search results, see also "To display search zoom windows"...

  • Page 716: M-Phy Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) To achieve power efficiency and high-performance transmissions, multiple power-sav- ing states and recovery times are utilized. Scalability and flexibility are achieved through the various transmission speed ranges and rates. Different modes of operations: ●...
  • Page 717 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Variant Selects the protocol running on the interface. You can select between the M-PHY, Uni- Pro and SSIC.
  • Page 718 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) on page 1875 BUS<m>:MPHY:DTWO:SOURce on page 1875 BUS<m>:MPHY:DTHRee:SOURce Threshold setup Opens a dialog, where you can set the tresholds for digitization of signals for each lane. "Thresholds" Enter individual values for each line directly in the fields.
  • Page 719 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 13.14.2.2 Display settings Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. To enhance the decode possibilities of the M-PHY or UniPro protocol, you can use an additional setting in the "Display"...

  • Page 720: M-Phy Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 8. Enable "Decode". 13.14.3 M-PHY trigger 13.14.3.1 M-PHY trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 721 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU SOF ← Type Triggers on a UniPro Downlink Protocol Data Unit (DL PDU) Start Of Frame (SOF) that matches the specified: ● Prepare length ● ●...
  • Page 722 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU EOF ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame (EOF) frame that matches the specified conditions: ● Prepare length ● ● DL PDU NAC ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Negative Acknowledgment Control (NAC) frame that matches the specified conditions: ●...
  • Page 723 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU AFC ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Acknowledgement and L2 Flow Control (AFC) frame that matches the specified conditions: ● Prepare length ● ●...
  • Page 724 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) ● Index ● This control frame is used mainly for power mode change and L1.5 link management. It is also used in scrambling request. Trigger Upr0 ← Type Triggers on a UniPro Trigger Upper0 frame.
  • Page 725 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Prepare length Sets the prepare length. LCC Type Selects the type of LCC command to be triggered on. "Any LCC Command" All the available LCC commands "HIBERN8-SLEEP" Switches the power-saving state to ultra-low power without configura- tion loss.
  • Page 726 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Reserved" Reserved bit command. These bits are reserved for future use. Remote command: on page 1879 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:LCCType WORD 1/WORD 2/WORD 3/WORD 4 Sets the specified words to be triggered on. The setup for a word consists of the condi- tion and one or two word patterns.
  • Page 727 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Data Sets the data to be triggered on. The trigger data setup consists of a comparison con- dition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "Data Min/Data"...
  • Page 728 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 1885 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:CONDition on page 1886 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:MIN on page 1886 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:MAX Sets the specified Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to be triggered on. The CRC setup consists of the condition and one or two CRC patterns.
  • Page 729 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the credit pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 519.
  • Page 730 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Errors Sets the type of error events to be triggered on. Reserved Bit Error ← Errors Triggers on reserved bit error. This error means that the waveform violates the reserved field according to the specifi- cation.
  • Page 731 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 4. Tap "Serial bus" and select the serial bus that is set to M-PHY, e.g.: The "Protocol" selection is then automatically set to "M-PHY". 5. Select the "Type" to use in the M-PHY protocol analysis. 6.
  • Page 732 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Field name / Condition Summary / Enable This table lists the field numbers and names in the selected frame together with a sum- mary of the user settings of checking conditions for each field and a checkbox to enable the checking.

  • Page 733: M-Phy Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) on page 1924 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:IMIN on page 1924 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMIN on page 1924 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:IMAX on page 1924 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMAX 13.14.3.4 Triggering on SSIC Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the "M-PHY" > "Variant" = "SSIC" signal to be ana- lyzed.

  • Page 734: Search On Decoded M-Phy Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Table 13-20: Content of the Decode results table Column Description Frame Frame count State Overall state of the frame indicating, for example, if the frame is valid or invalid Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Info...
  • Page 735 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) For general information on how to handle the search functionality, see Chapter 11, "Search functions", on page 448. 13.14.5.1 M-PHY search setup Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup search" Type Selects the search type for the selected protocol.
  • Page 736 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU EOF ← Type Searches for a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame (EOF) that matches the specified condition. DL PDU NAC ← Type Searches for a UniPro DL PDU Negative Acknowledgment Control (NAC) frame that matches the specified RReq condition.
  • Page 737 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "READ-MFG-INFO" Retrieves manufacturing ID and vendor-specific information "READ-VEND-INFO" Retrieves the additional four delimited bytes containing vendor-spe- cific information "WRITE-ATTRIBUTE" Sets the configuration parameters required for lane operation "PWM-G0/PWM-G1/PWM-G2/PWM-G3/PWM-G4/PWM-G5/PWM-G6/PWM-G7"...
  • Page 738 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Sets the specified Traffic Class (TC) to be searched for. TC is used for classifying the traffic flow based on protocol and port number, e.g. TC0 and TC1 are two priority classes with guaranteed link reliability defined and used in L2. "Data"...
  • Page 739 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Sets the specified Frame Sequence Number (FSN) to be searched for. The FSN setup consists of the condition and one or two FSN patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific FSN, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal" or a range.
  • Page 740 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: For "RReq": on page 1910 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:RREQ For "CReq" on page 1910 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREQ Credit Sets the specified credit to be searched for. The credit setup consists of the condition and one or two credit patterns.
  • Page 741 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the PACP Function ID pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 519.
  • Page 742 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 1915 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:ERRor:LENGth 13.14.5.2 M-PHY search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
  • Page 743 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 5. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTP displays the "Search Results" box that lists the detected events. For information on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi- gate the search results, see also "To display search zoom windows"...

  • Page 744: Custom: Manchester / Nrz (Option R&S Rtp-K50)M

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M 13.15 Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M R&S RTP-K50 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTP to analyze customizable serial bus signals encoded by the following coding standards: ●...
  • Page 745 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Serial Bus uses a combination of automatic algorithms and user configurable parame- ters. Quaternary Symbols The software supports not just traditional binary symbols "0" and "1", but also arbitrary violation waveforms that use two additional symbols, yielding a total of four valid "qua- ternary bit"...

  • Page 746: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M with eventual Manchester coding violations. In these situations, a fixed "Bit Rate" set- ting has to be provided by the user to bypass the software's estimation algorithm. 13.15.2 Custom: Manchester / NRZ configuration If you need information on how to get started with configuring the custom serial bus setup, see Chapter 13.15.2.6, "Configuring custom Manchester / NRZ...
  • Page 747 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "Manchester" Selects the coding standard Manchester. Optional "Timing settings" are "Bit Rate" (default: disabled, 10 Mbit/s) and "Gap time" (default: disabled, 10 µs). "Manchester II" Selects the coding standard Manchester II, which is the inverted sig- nal of the coding standard Manchester.
  • Page 748 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1935 BUS<m>:CMSB:NRZ:CLCK Data Polarity (Manchester) Defines the polarity of the custom serial bus data signal in Manchester coding stand- ards. The available settings are "Normal" or "Inverted". Remote command: on page 1933 BUS<m>:CMSB:MANChester:POLarity...
  • Page 749 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "Second Edge" ● At "Idle" = "low": data are captured on the clock's falling edge (high-to-low transition) and propagated on a rising edge. ● At "Idle" = "high": data are captured on the clock's rising edge (low-to-high transition) and propagated on a falling edge.
  • Page 750 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1938 BUS<m>:CMSB:NRZ:ENAPolarity Set Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization of each signal line and the hysteresis. If the signal voltage on the line is higher than the upper threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, if the signal voltage is below the lower threshold, the signal state is consid- ered low.
  • Page 751 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "Threshold" Directly sets the threshold values. ● For Manchester: upper threshold in the upper field, lower thresh- old in the lower field. ● For NRZ Clocked: clock threshold in the upper field, data thresh- old in the middle field and enable threshold in the lower field.
  • Page 752 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset Check bit rate Enables the bit rate settings for the coding standards "Manchester" and "Manchester II".
  • Page 753 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M For more details on gap time and idle conditions, see Chapter 13.15.1.1, "Special fea- tures of Manchester coding", on page 744. Remote command: on page 1941 BUS<m>:CMSB:GAPTime:VALue 13.15.2.3 Frame format configuration This dialog enables you to describe the generic format and logical structure of typical protocols by creating customized frame descriptions of various structures and lengths.
  • Page 754 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Frames A frame format description (or frame description, for short) is represented by one "page" in this dialog. It can be created by clicking on "Add". If one or several frame descriptions already exist, the new frame description is then created at the end of the frame format description list (or frame list, for short).
  • Page 755 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M it overwrites any subsequent frame description. However, instead of using a "catch all" frame description, the built-in "undescribed bits" display as mentioned above may be the better approach to create frame descriptions. It is in the responsibility of the user to define unambiguous settings for each frame type.
  • Page 756 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Bits This crucial information defines the length of the cell and - based on the previous cells - also the cell end position and the next cell start position within a frame. If, for a given bit count, the Condition value is longer, it is truncated.
  • Page 757 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "= (equal)" The equal operator (represented by the "=" sign) defines a pattern for the field to match. Valid condition entries are characters that match the cell's defined "Format", "Bit order", and "Bits". In binary format, for example, valid characters are "1", "0", "H"...
  • Page 758 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "[ ] (array)" The array operator (represented by the "[" and "]" bracket signs) defines the number of permissible repetitions of the cell. Example: Fixed-Length Array: [n] The length parameter "n" is a decimal number > 0, which determines that the cell is repeated n times within the frame.
  • Page 759 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "crc5usb(n-m)" The crc 5-bit operator performs a check for a 5\-bit CRC function using the polynomial as defined by the USB standard. n and m define the index range for the CRC check. For example, if the CRC shall check fields 1 to 4, the function shall be written "crc5usb(1-5)".
  • Page 760 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1944 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CELL<o>:FORMat Bit Order This defines, in which order the bits of a cell's Condition value are evaluated: either the most significant bit (MSB) or the least significant bit (LSB) first. Since the bit order is considered for the interpretation of the condition, you should specify MSB or LSB cor- rectly.
  • Page 761 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Figure 13-18: Example of XML file syntax with three custom frame format descriptions The first out of three XML frames in Figure 13-18 is interpreted by the software in the following way: A suitable XML file as shown in Figure 13-18...
  • Page 762 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M ● "Field Name", in string format. ● "Bit count" specifies the length of bits, in numerical format. ● "Condition" (optional) identifies the bit pattern to match, in string format. ●...
  • Page 763 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1953 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:ENABle Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.

  • Page 764: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M 13.15.3 Custom: Manchester / NRZ trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on Custom serial bus sig- nals, see Chapter 13.15.3.2, "Triggering on custom Manchester / NRZ serial bus", on page 768.
  • Page 765 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Frame Start ← Type For Manchester and NRZ Clocked coding standards, the frame start trigger is set to the end of the gap time. The start of frame (SOF) condition is the first bit after the gap (timeout).
  • Page 766 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1948 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:PATTern on page 1948 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ICONdition on page 1948 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:IMIN on page 1949 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:IMAX on page 1941 BUS<m>:CMSB:GAPTime:VALue on page 1949 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:NRZ:WRDLength Advanced Trigger on various frame types, fields in the frames, and data patterns. Which settings are available, depends on what you have defined in the "Format"...
  • Page 767 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings". To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.

  • Page 768: Custom Filter

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M "Min" Specifies the index or sets the start value of an index range. "Max" Sets the end value of an index range, if "Condition" is set to "In range". Remote command: on page 1952 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:IMAX...
  • Page 769 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Frame type Selects the frame type for the custom bus filtering. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings". To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
  • Page 770 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Error types: Item name, Enable The table lists the error types you can filter on. Select the required errors in the "Enable" column. Available are "CRC" error and "Parity" error. Remote command: on page 1953 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:ERRor<n>:ENABle...

  • Page 771: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1956 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMAX on page 1956 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMIN on page 1956 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IOPerator 13.15.5 Custom: Manchester / NRZ decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.

  • Page 772: Search On Decoded Custom Manchester / Nrz Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Table 13-23: Content of the "Decode results details" table Column Description State Overall state of the cell: either OK or the relevant error condition (e.g. length error) Type The type of frame, as specified with the "Frame type" Numeric Data content of the cell (e.g.
  • Page 773 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)M Remote command: on page 1964 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:ERRor<m>:ENABle on page 1964 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FIENable on page 1966 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:ENABle on page 1964 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRENable on page 1964 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:BIT on page 1964 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:BIT on page 1965 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMAX on page 1965 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DMAX...

  • Page 774: 8B/10B (Option R&S Rtp-K52)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 463. 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 13.15.6.1, "Custom Manchester / NRZ search setup",...

  • Page 775: 8B/10B Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Figure 13-19: Coding scheme of the 8b/10b The additional two bits I and j that join the stream are variable and ensure the running disparity. There are two types of characters used in the 8b/10b coding, special characters Kx.y and data characters Dx.y.
  • Page 776 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Signal type Selects the signal type that is used for the decoding. You can choose between a differ- ential and single-ended signal. Remote command: on page 1978 BUS<m>:EBTB:TYPE...
  • Page 777 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Threshold High Sets the threshold high of the signal, if "Signal type" > "Differential". Remote command: on page 1975 BUS<m>:EBTB:DIFFerential:THRHigh Threshold Low Sets the threshold low of the signal, if "Signal type" > "Differential". Remote command: on page 1975 BUS<m>:EBTB:DIFFerential:THRLow...
  • Page 778 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:FAUToset Sync symbol Selects the sync symbol, a control symbol used for low-level control functions. You can select one of the comma control symbols (K28.1, K28.5, K28.7) used for synchroniza- tion or you can enter a pattern.
  • Page 779 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Display Format Selects the display format for the results of the display table. Remote command: on page 1976 BUS<m>:EBTB:DISF 13.16.2.4 Configuring 8b/10b For configuration, you assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold, the bitrate, and the sync symbol.

  • Page 780: 8B/10B Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 13.16.3 8b/10b trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on 8b/10b signals, see Chapter 13.16.3.2, "Triggering on 8b/10b data", on page 783. Otherwise proceed with the 8b/10b trigger settings. 13.16.3.1 8b/10b trigger setup Access: [Protocol] >...
  • Page 781 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) K/D Codes Symbol ← K/D symbol Selects the control character. Remote command: on page 1981 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SYMType x value ← K/D symbol Sets the x value of the data character Dx.y to be triggered on, if "K/D symbol" > "Dx.y". Remote command: on page 1979 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:DX...
  • Page 782 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Remote command: on page 1980 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SYME Error Condition Triggers on the selected error conditions. Disparity error ← Error Condition Triggers on disparity errors. Remote command: on page 1979 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:DISParityerr Glitching error ← Error Condition Triggers on glitch errors.

  • Page 783: 8B/10B Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 13.16.3.2 Triggering on 8b/10b data Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 8b/10b signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.

  • Page 784: Search On Decoded 8B/10B Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Table 13-24: Content of the decode result table Column Description Symbol Shows the index number of the symbol State Overall state of the symbol Start Time of the symbol start in relation to the trigger point K/D Code The K/D code 8-bit...
  • Page 785 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Type Selects the type of condition to be searched for. Available are: ● "K/D symbol" ● "8 bit pattern" ● "10 bit pattern" ● "Expression" ● "Error Condition" Press "Define search details" to open a dialog for defining search type dependent set- tings.
  • Page 786 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Disparity error Searches for disparity errors. Remote command: on page 1984 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:DISParityerr Glitching error Searches for glitching errors. Remote command: on page 1985 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:GLITcherror Unknown symbol error Searches for a symbol that is not defined by the the 8b/10b. Remote command: on page 1987 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:UNK...

  • Page 787: Mdio (Option R&S Rtp-K55)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● on page 1989 SEARch:RESult:EBTB:SYMBol<m>:STOP? 13.16.5.3 Searching 8b/10b data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the 8b/10b signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed. The search for events is set up in the following way: 1.

  • Page 788: The Mdio Protocol

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● The MDIO protocol....................788 ● MDIO configuration....................789 ● MDIO trigger......................793 ● MDIO decode results.................... 796 ● Search on decoded MDIO data................798 13.17.1 The MDIO protocol MDIO is used for bidirectional transfer of control and status information between the physical layer entity (PHY) and the station management entities (STA).

  • Page 789: Mdio Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● PHYAD = address of a physical layer entity (in Clause 22) ● PRTAD = address of a port (in Clause 45) ● REGAD = register address within a PHY (in Clause 22) ●...
  • Page 790 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Figure 13-20: Serial bus MDIO protocol configuration dialog See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Source MDIO requires two source channels, one for clock and one for data. "Clock"...
  • Page 791 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● Vil(max) is being used for the falling edge evaluation. This "l" (low) threshold is the maximum level for the signal to be identified as "0". If the signal value comes from a high state (hence, falling edge), the state remains to be considered as high ("1"), until it has fallen below Vil(max).
  • Page 792 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. MDIO Specific Label Settings Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 793: Mdio Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. Select the "Setup" tab. 4. In the "Setup" tab, set the "Protocol" > "MDIO". 5. Select the waveform for the "Clock" and "Data" lines. 6.
  • Page 794 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Serial bus Selects the serial bus to be triggered on. Make sure to select the correct bus before you enter the settings. To trigger on a serial bus, the signals sources must be channel signals. If the data or clock source is a math or reference waveform, you cannot trigger on that bus.
  • Page 795 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) "Data" Sets the trigger to the data field. For more information on the data condition, see MDIO in the Ethernet standard. The trigger instant is at the end of the frame after the last data bit, as indicated in the GUI. Note: All data triggers are always at the end of the frame, even if the specified pattern to trigger for is at a different position within the data word.

  • Page 796: Mdio Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) REGAD/DEVAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the register address or device address (5 bits) of the frame pattern; available only in trigger type "Data". Remote command: on page 1994 TRIGger<m>:MDIO:REGI DATA/ADDRESS ← MDIO Trigger Type Defines the payload data pattern or address pattern (16 bits);...
  • Page 797 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Decode Results Table The "Decode results" table contains information about all decoded frames. Table 13-27: Content of the Decode results table Column Description Frame Number of the acquired frame State of frame, available messages are: State ●...

  • Page 798: Search On Decoded Mdio Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Chapter 22.17.18.3, "Decode results", on page 1994. 13.17.5 Search on decoded MDIO data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 799 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Selects the start of frame code of the frame pattern; available only in search criteria type "Data". Permissible frame patterns are: Clause 22, Clause 45, or Any Remote command: on page 2000 SEARch:TRIGger:MDIO:ST Selects the Type of Frame code (or OP code, OpCode, operation code);...

  • Page 800: Usb (Option R&S Rtp-K60)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● on page 2003 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:STOP? ● on page 2002 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:ST? ● on page 2004 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:TYPE? ● on page 2001 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:PHYS? ● on page 2002 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:REGI? ● on page 2001 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:DATA? ● on page 2004 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:SYMBol? 13.17.5.3 Searching MDIO data...

  • Page 801: The Usb Protocol

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● The USB protocol....................801 ● USB 2.0 configuration................... 806 ● USB 2.0 trigger......................810 ● USB 2.0 decode results..................819 ● Search on decoded USB 2.0 data.................820 13.18.1 The USB protocol The USB protocol was developed, starting in 1996, by the nonprofit organization USB Implementers Forum, Inc.
  • Page 802 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● Addressing scheme: a maximum of 127 connected devices can be distinguished, because a packet's address field length is limited to 7 bits. USB devices have up to 16 OUT endpoints (from host to device) and up to 16 IN endpoints (from device to host).
  • Page 803 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) each data packet, but disregard it unless it carries the correct address. In reply, only the addressed device (one at a time) can send data upstream, to the host. The USB architecture supports four different kinds of data transfer: control, bulk, inter- rupt or isochronous transfer.
  • Page 804 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) The PID's length is 8 bit, beginning (LSB) with the fields PID0, PID1, PID2 and PID3. Those 4 bits are repeated in PID4, PID5, PID6 and PID7, but in complemen- tary form (for integrity checking). The PID is the only part of a packet not to be cov- ered by the CRC (see below).
  • Page 805 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Packet Name Meaning type value 0x5A Data not accepted, typically equivalent with some type of EAGAIN, meaning that the data should be resent later STALL 0x1E A severe error has occurred, the target endpoint cannot be addressed until it is explicitly cleared again NYET 0x96...

  • Page 806: Usb 2.0 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● Data Selection: DATA0, DATA1, DATA2, MDATA, (for USB 1.x only: AND-ing with user defined PID check, payload and CRC values) ● Handshake Packet Setup: Triggering on handshake packet, trigger with specific settings: ACK, NAK, NYET, STALL or ERR handshake packet ●...
  • Page 807 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Protocol type Defines the USB protocol technology and transmission speed. "USB Low speed" Selects USB 2.0 low speed protocol (1.5 Mbit/s). Figure 13-26: USB low speed protocol configuration User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 808 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "USB Full speed" Selects USB 2.0 full speed protocol (12 Mbit/s). Figure 13-27: USB full speed protocol configuration User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 809 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "USB High speed" Selects USB high-speed protocol (480 Mbit/s). As the signal is differ- ential, there is only one source and one threshold to be defined. Figure 13-28: USB high-speed protocol configuration Remote command: on page 2005 BUS<m>:USB:TECHnology...

  • Page 810: Usb 2.0 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Remote command: on page 2006 BUS<m>:USB:DIFFerential:SOURce Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization of each signal line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, if the signal value is below the threshold, the signal state is considered low.
  • Page 811 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) 13.18.3.1 USB 2.0 trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected USB 2.0 protocol type and trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup.
  • Page 812 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Start of packet ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the SOP (start of packet) field. The start of packet condition is the end of the SYNC field. The trigger instant is the end of the SOP field. End of packet ←...
  • Page 813 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Token Sets the trigger to one out of four different token types: ● "OUT" ● "IN" ● "SOF" ● "SETUP" If no additional conditions are set, the trigger instant is after the PID. If the PID error check is selected: ●...
  • Page 814 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) If no additional conditions are set, the trigger instant is after the PID. If the PID error check is selected: ● If an error is found in the PID's complementary form, the trigger is set immediately after the 8 bit of the PID ●...
  • Page 815 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● "ERR" ● "SPLIT" ● "PING" If no additional conditions are set, the trigger instant is after the PID. If the PID error check is selected: ● if an error is found in the PID's complementary form, the trigger is set immediately after the 8 bit of the PID ●...
  • Page 816 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Unexpected Triggers on any illegal PID. This is a PID that is not allowed in USB PID error" low speed and USB full speed protocols, especially PID's announcing packets such as SPLIT, DATA2, MDATA, or other noncompliant pack- ets.
  • Page 817 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Payload Defines, whether a payload check that meets specific conditions is executed or not. "Condition" Sets the operator "any" or "equal" that allows to trigger for payload data at any position or at a specified position. "Position"...
  • Page 818 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Condition" Defining a specific port number or a port number range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.

  • Page 819: Usb 2.0 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) on page 2016 TRIGger<m>:USB:TMIN on page 2016 TRIGger<m>:USB:TMAX 13.18.3.2 Triggering on USB 2.0 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the USB 2.0 signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.

  • Page 820: Search On Decoded Usb 2.0 Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...
  • Page 821 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) To search on decoded data, set the search source to "SerBus" for the configured proto- col. For general information on how to handle the search functionality, see Chapter 11, "Search functions", on page 448. If you need information on how to get started with searching USB 2.0 data, see Chap- ter 13.18.5.3, "Searching USB...
  • Page 822 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Individual search parameters (which do not depend on the USB protocol type and trig- ger settings), can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. Remote command: on page 2033 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SSOP on page 2035 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:STOKen...
  • Page 823 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Special PID Searches for four different special packet identifier types: "PREamble", "ERR", "SPLIT", or "PING", and "Any" special PID. For "Any", "PREamble", or "ERR", there are no additional parameters to be defined. For "SPLIT", additional search parameters are "Address check", "SC check", "Port check", "SEU check", and "ET check".
  • Page 824 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Min" Specifies an address, or sets the start value of an address range. "Max" Sets the end value of an address range if "Condition" (SEARch: TRIGger:USB:ACONdition) is set to INRange or OORange. Remote command: on page 2036 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WADD...
  • Page 825 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Position" Available only if "Condition" (SEARch:TRIGger:USB:DPOPerator) is set to equal. Specifies the position in which a special data pattern is to be searched within the payload data packet. "Data Condi- Sets the operator ("equal" or "unequal", SEARch:TRIGger:USB: tion"...
  • Page 826 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Max" Sets the end value of an SEU value range if "Condition" (SEARch: TRIGger:USB:SCONdition) is set to INRange or OORange. Remote command: on page 2038 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WSEU on page 2032 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SCONdition on page 2032 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SMIN on page 2032 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SMAX...

  • Page 827: Usb 3.1 (Option R&S Rtp-K61/K62)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● on page 2041 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:PID? ● on page 2041 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:PORT? ● on page 2042 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:SC? ● on page 2042 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:SEU? 13.18.5.3 Searching USB data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the USB signal to be decoded and analyzed. The search for events is set up in the following way: 1.

  • Page 828: The Usb 3.1 Protocol

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● The USB 3.1 protocol....................828 ● USB 3.1 configuration................... 836 ● USB 3.1 trigger......................841 ● USB 3.1 decode results..................844 ● Search on decoded USB 3.1 data.................846 13.19.1 The USB 3.1 protocol The USB 3.1 protocol standard was published on July 26 , 2013, strongly enhancing the performance of the USB 2.0 protocol.
  • Page 829 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 3 = Differential data signal D+ 4 = Ground pin for power return 5 = SuperSpeed receiver differential pair Rx- 6 = SuperSpeed receiver differential pair Rx+ 7 = Ground drain for signal return 8 = SuperSpeed transmitter differential pair Tx- 9 = SuperSpeed transmitter differential pair Tx+ * = Connector images courtesy of Wikipedia authors smial and Unconventional2...
  • Page 830 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Specific protocol features Key features of USB 3.1 Gen 1 that are addressed by option R&S RTP-K61 include: ● Since 5 Gbps is too fast for serial pattern triggering, the option uses a search- based software trigger ●...
  • Page 831 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● CP0 - compliance data pattern. Runs in scrambled mode. ● CP1/CP2 - compliance data pattern. Run in unscrambled mode. ● CP3/CP5or6 - compliance data pattern. Run in both scrambled and unscrambled mode.
  • Page 832 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● PCNF - Port Configuration = All Enhanced SuperSpeed ports that support down- stream port capability can send this link management packet (LMP), which is simi- lar to Port Capability. If a port, which was to be configured in the upstream facing mode, does not receive this LMP within a defined time after link initialization, then the upstream port shall transition to "eSS.Disabled"...
  • Page 833 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ted (sub)type has been found. If some rough type identification is possible, the unknown data may fit one of the following descriptions of unknown types. ● UDVN - Unknown Device Notification = A Device Notification transaction packet can only be sent by a device, to inform the host of an asynchronous change in a device or interface state (e.g., to identify the function within a device that caused...
  • Page 834 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Frame Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Field7 Field8 Fld.9 Field10 Fld.11 Link Delay Mea- SubType LDM Type LDMS Rsvd Response Rsvd Rsvd surement Delay NRDY Rsvd Device Address SubType Rsvd EPTNum Rsvd StreamId Rsvd PING...
  • Page 835 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 836: Usb 3.1 Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Table 13-34: Frames without additional fields other than in this table Frame Field1 Field2 Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Fld.8 Field9 BCNT BERC BDAT BDAT BERC BERC BRST BRST Data Packet Payload HPSTART Data DPPEND...
  • Page 837 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 13.19.2.1 USB 3.1 configuration settings Access: [Protocol] > "Setup" tab > "Protocol" = USB3 Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. Figure 13-32: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings",...
  • Page 838 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Source Defines the source for the data signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source. If you want to trigger on the serial bus, analog channel sources are required.
  • Page 839 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) At this tab, you can enable and define the equalization techniques used for the equali- zation at the reciever side of the signal. CTLE Continuous time linear equalization (CTLE) is an equalization that can be used for improving the signal performance.
  • Page 840 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Remote command: on page 2046 BUS<m>:CTLE:DCGain Channel Length ← CTLE Selects the USB Super Speed channel length. Remote command: on page 2048 BUS<m>:USBThree:PROTocol Defines the settings of the decision feedback equalization (DFE). DFE correction is needed when the channel is distosrted.

  • Page 841: Usb 3.1 Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 6. Set the logical thresholds: Either enter user-defined values directly in the "Thresh- old" fields, or set the thresholds to the middle reference levels with "Auto thresh- olds". 7. Enable "Decode". For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.19.2.1, "USB 3.1 configuration settings",...
  • Page 842 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 843 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Remote command: on page 2063 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:FIENable on page 2063 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:ENABle Data Defines for the selected field, how a data check is executed. "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "Min"...

  • Page 844: Usb 3.1 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. Press "Setup trigger". 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4.
  • Page 845 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Table 13-36: Content of the Decode results table Column Description Frame Frame number State Overall state of the frame, for example "OK" or "Incomplete" Start Start time of the frame Frame Type Type of the frame Info Specific frame information, for example result of the Link Speed Measurement =...

  • Page 846: Search On Decoded Usb 3.1 Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 13.19.5 Search on decoded USB 3.1 data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 847 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria". To specify these parameters, select a field in the table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state. For a description of how to set the search conditions, see Chapter 13.19.3.1, "USB 3.1 trigger...

  • Page 848: Usbpd (Option R&S Rtp-K63)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) ● on page 2078 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:STARt? ● on page 2079 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:STOP? ● on page 2079 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:TYPE? ● on page 2079 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STATus? ● on page 2080 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STARt? ● on page 2080 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STOP? ● on page 2081 SEARch:RESult:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:VAL? ●...

  • Page 849: The Usb Power Delivery Protocol

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) This chapter describes: ● The USB power delivery protocol................849 ● USBPD configuration.................... 850 ● USBPD trigger.......................853 ● USBPD decode results..................856 ● Search on decoded USBPD data................858 13.20.1 The USB power delivery protocol The requirements on the USB have changed in the last years with the need of provid- ing power through the USB port additionally to the data transfer.

  • Page 850: Usbpd Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Table 13-38: Frame packet types SCPI Description Message type ALRT Alert message Data BATT Battery status Data BIST Built in self-test Data RQST Request Data SINK Sink capabilities message Data Source capabilities message Data VEND Vendor defined message...
  • Page 851 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Data Defines the source settings for the data signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source.
  • Page 852 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Current advertisment thresholds The signal level provides information about the current advertisement between the bursts. These thresholds determine the levels at which the current advertisement modes are defined. "vRd-1.5" Sets the threshold at USB Type-C current of 1.5 A. "vRd-USB"...

  • Page 853: Usbpd Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
  • Page 854 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 13.20.3.1 USBPD trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" In this section, all trigger settings for USBPD are described. The user interface of the instrument guides you through the trigger setup. Make sure that: ●...
  • Page 855 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and open "Set details". You can define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state. The trigger instant is the last criterion that is fulfilled. Remote command: on page 2086 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRENable...

  • Page 856: Usbpd Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Remote command: on page 2087 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:BIT on page 2087 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:BIT Index Defines for the selected field, how an index check is executed. "Condition" Defining a specific index or an index range requires to set the opera- tor to one of the following conditions: equal, in range.
  • Page 857 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 2. In the "Serial Bus" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show table" and "Show binary". 3. If required, enable "Zoom coupling" For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514.

  • Page 858: Search On Decoded Usbpd Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Column Description Frame Type Type of the frame Info Information about the frame Table 13-40: Content of the Details frame table Column Description State Overall state of the field Start Start time of the field Type Type (name) of field Numeric value...
  • Page 859 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) You can define individual search parameters for individual fields in the table below the "Search criteria" dialog. To specify these parameters, select a field in this table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state. For a description of how to set the search conditions, see Chapter 13.20.3.1, "USBPD trigger...
  • Page 860 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 13.20.5.2 USBPD search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog to better see the "Search Results" table. To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.

  • Page 861: Spacewire (Option R&S Rtp-K65)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to USBPD (e.g. "SerBus1", unless already selected). The search dialog for USBPD protocol analysis is opened. 5. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 13.20.5.1, "USBPD search setup", on page 858.

  • Page 862: Spacewire Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) ● Control characters containing a parity-bit, a data-control flag and the 2-bit control code. The data control flag is set to 1 and indicates that this is a control character. Figure 13-35: SpaceWire control characters Also there are two control codes: ●...
  • Page 863 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Strobe Selects the source for the strobe signal. Remote command: on page 2107 BUS<m>:SWIRe:STRBe:SOURce Data Selects the source for the data signal. Remote command: on page 2106 BUS<m>:SWIRe:DATA:SOURce...
  • Page 864 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the strobe/data signal. Remote command: on page 2107 BUS<m>:SWIRe:STRBe:HYSTeresis on page 2106 BUS<m>:SWIRe:DATA:HYSTeresis Show thresholds If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1549 BUS<m>:THReshold...
  • Page 865 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) 13.21.2.3 Display settings Access: [Protocol] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 514. Decode Layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 866: Spacewire Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) 13.21.3 SpaceWire trigger 13.21.3.1 SpaceWire trigger settings Access: [Protocol] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals.
  • Page 867 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) "Data pattern" Sets the trigger to a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame" Sets the trigger to a null frame, a frame without usable data. "Time Code" Sets the trigger to a time-code control code. You can define the data pattern of the time code to be triggered on.
  • Page 868 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Data(Data Pattern) Sets the specified data type for the data pattern to be triggered on. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...

  • Page 869: Spacewire Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) 13.21.4 SpaceWire decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Setup" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...

  • Page 870: Search On Decoded Spacewire Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Column Description Numeric Hexadecimal value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field Tools Press "Display settings" in the "Deode Reults" table, to access the "Display" tab. Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Chapter 22.17.22.3, "Decode results",...
  • Page 871 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) "Data pattern" Searches for a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame" Searches for a null frame, a frame without usable data. "Time Code" Searches for a time-code control code. You can define the data pat- tern of the time code to be searched for.
  • Page 872 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Remote command: on page 2118 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:DATA:CONDition on page 2118 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:DATA:MAX on page 2118 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:DATA:MIN Parity Error Checks the parity of every frame and searches for even parity. Remote command: on page 2119 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:ERRor:PARity ESC Error Searches for an escape error.

  • Page 873: Pcie (Option R&S Rtp-K72/K73)

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) 3. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to SpaceWire (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected). 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 13.21.5.1, "SpaceWire search setup", on page 870. 5.
  • Page 874 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) ● Data link layer: used for link management and data integrity. Error detection and correction are also done in this layer. The data link layer produces data link layer packets (DLLP). ● Physical layer: includes the circuitry for the interface operation.
  • Page 875 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) SCPI name Description Type PMEL1 / PMEL23 Power management Enter L1/ L23 DLLP PMASRL1 Power management Active State Request DLLP PMRA Power management request acknowledg- DLLP ment VENDS Vendor Specific DLLP IFC1P / IFC2P Initialization flow control 1/2 posted DLLP requests...

  • Page 876: Pcie Configuration

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) 13.22.2 PCIe configuration 13.22.2.1 PCIe configuration settings Access: [Protocol] > "Setup" tab > "Protocol" = "PCIe" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Generation...
  • Page 877 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Link Selects the link width, the number of lanes that are used for the transmission of the data. Remote command: on page 2124 BUS<m>:PCIE:LNKW Descrambling Enables descrambling of the data. Remote command: on page 2123 BUS<m>:PCIE:DSCRambling Lane 0/1/2/3...
  • Page 878 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Couple thresholds ← Thresholds Enables the same threshold value for all lanes. Find thresholds ← Thresholds Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude. Remote command: on page 1548 BUS<m>:SETReflevels...

  • Page 879: Pcie Digital Signal Processing (Dsp) Settings

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
  • Page 880 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) clock signal matches the frequency and is aligned to the phase of the data stream. The recovered clock can be used to sample the data stream and to obtain the sequence of transmitted bits.
  • Page 881 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "Damping" Sets the damping factor, which is only relevant for second order PLL. Remote command: on page 2127 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:ORDer on page 2126 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:BWIDth on page 2127 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:RELBwidth on page 2126 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:DAMPing Initial phase sync. Defines the phase reference for the first clock edge.
  • Page 882 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) CTLE Continuous time linear equalization (CTLE) is an equalization that can be used for improving the signal performance. It boosts the high frequency noise and the signal. Thus it helps reduce the inter-symbol interference (ISI) on the reciever side. The transfer function for behavioral CTLE is defined as follows: Figure 13-37: Transfer function for behavioral CTLE ω...

  • Page 883: Pcie Trigger

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) DC Gain (A ) ← CTLE Sets the adjustable DC gain. This value can be chosen according to the channel loss characteristics. For low-loss channels, you can set a value close to 0 dB. Remote command: on page 2046 BUS<m>:CTLE:DCGain...
  • Page 884 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 885 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) TLP ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a transaction type. "Any type" Triggers on any transaction type. "Mem" Triggers on memory transaction type used for data transfers to mem- ory-mapped locations. "IO" Triggers on I/O transaction type used for data transfers to I/O-map- ped locations.
  • Page 886 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Snoop ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a snoop state. Remote command: on page 2139 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:SNOO Requester ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a requester ID, consisting of the requester's bus number, device number, and function number.
  • Page 887 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2138 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:CPLS Completer ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a completer ID, consisting of the completer's bus number, device number, and function number. Remote command: on page 2137 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:CPID DLLP Type Sets the trigger to the type of DLLP.
  • Page 888 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Phase ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a phase state. Remote command: on page 2133 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:PHAS VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 2133 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC...
  • Page 889 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) VL Number ← MRInitFC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a virtual link (VL) number. Remote command: on page 2134 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VLNR VH Absent ← MRInitFC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on absent virtual hierarchies (VH). Remote command: on page 2132 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:HABS...
  • Page 890 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) A ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on the value of the A bit (Ack/Request). Remote command: on page 2133 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:RESA VH Group ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on the selected virtual hierarchies group. Remote command: on page 2134 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHGR...
  • Page 891 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2132 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:FCTL:VCID DLLP PM conditions Triggers on a specified power management conditions. PM Type ← DLLP PM conditions Triggers on a power management type. Remote command: on page 2134 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:POWM DLLP Vendor conditions Triggers on a specified vendor conditions.
  • Page 892 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Triggers on 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Triggers on link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Triggers on end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Invalid sym- Triggers on invalid symbol errors.
  • Page 893 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Triggers on 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Triggers on link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Triggers on end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Unknown Triggers on an unknown packet. packet"...

  • Page 894: Pcie Gen 1/2 Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and select the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. Press "Setup trigger". 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4.

  • Page 895: Pcie Gen 1/2 Search

    ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Table 13-43: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the packet Start Start time of the packet Type Type of packet Table 13-44: Content of the Details frame table Column Description Sequence count...
  • Page 896 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Make sure that: ● In the [Protocol] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
  • Page 897 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) TLP (Transaction layer) Specifies the search conditions for the transaction layer type search. TLP ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a transaction type. "Any type" Searches for any transaction type. "Mem" Searches for memory transaction type used for data transfers to memory-mapped locations.
  • Page 898 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2160 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:ORDE Snoop ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a snoop state. Remote command: on page 2161 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:SNOO Requester ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a requester ID, consisting of the requester's bus number, device number, and function number.
  • Page 899 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Status ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a completion status. Remote command: on page 2159 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:CPLS Completer ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a completer ID, consisting of the completer's bus number, device number, and function number.
  • Page 900 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Phase ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a phase state. Remote command: on page 2151 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:PHAS VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 2152 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC...
  • Page 901 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) VL Number ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a virtual link (VL) number. Remote command: on page 2153 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VLNR VH Absent ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for absent virtual hierarchies (VH). Remote command: on page 2151 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:HABS...
  • Page 902 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) A ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for the value of the A bit (Ack/ Request). Remote command: on page 2151 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:RESA VH Group ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for the selected virtual hierarchies group. Remote command: on page 2152 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHGR...
  • Page 903 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2150 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:FCTL:VCID DLLP PM conditions Searches for a specified power management conditions. PM Type ← DLLP PM conditions Searches for a power management type. Remote command: on page 2153 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:POWM DLLP Vendor conditions Searches for a specified vendor conditions.
  • Page 904 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Searches for 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Searches for link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Searches for end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Invalid sym- Searches for invalid symbol errors.
  • Page 905 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Searches for 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Searches for link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Searches for end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Unknown Searches for an unknown packet. packet"...
  • Page 906 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. For an introduction to search results, see: ● Chapter 11.1.2, "Search results", on page 449 ●...

  • Page 907: Ddr (Option R&S Rtp-K91/K93 )

    ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 3. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to PCIe (e.g. "SB1"). 4. Specify the search criteria according to Chapter 13.22.6.1, "PCIe Gen 1/2 search settings", on page 895. 5.
  • Page 908 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 512 Variant Selects the DDR standard. "DDR3" Requires option R&S RTP-K91. Requires option R&S RTP-K93. "DDR4" Remote command: on page 2169 BUS<m>:DDR:STANdard Sets the channel for the data output signal.
  • Page 909 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Threshold Sets the threshold value for the digitization of the DQ/DQS lane. There are two ways to set the thresholds: ● "Threshold" Enter individual values for each line directly in the fields. ●...
  • Page 910 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several layers, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.

  • Page 911: Search On Decoded Ddr Data

    ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 13.23.2 Search on decoded DDR data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 912 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) DDR search You can select one or more frames to be searched for. Available are "Read", "Write, ", "Read NC" and "Write NC ". You can also define the data and/or index operators and values for the field, see details.
  • Page 913 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) "Min" Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. "Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 2177 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:DMAX on page 2177 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMAX...

  • Page 914: Ddr Decode Results

    ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) ● on page 2182 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:VAL? ● on page 2183 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:NWRDs? ● on page 2183 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:STARt? ● on page 2183 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:STATe? ● on page 2184 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:STOP? ● on page 2184 SEARch:RESult:DDR:FRAMe<m>:TYPE? 13.23.2.3 Searching for DDR data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the DDR signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed.

  • Page 915: Ddr Eye Diagram Analysis

    ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings. The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display. The decode information condenses or expands, depending on the horizontal scale.
  • Page 916 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) There are two ways to generate eye diagrams on the R&S RTP: ● Standard eye diagrams, which are a superposition of repetitively sampled digital data. ● DDR eye diagrams, which are generated by superimposing waveform slices from a multi-bit acquisition.
  • Page 917 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel (vertical subtabs E1 to E4). Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the left before you adjust the settings. State..........................917 Main source.........................917...
  • Page 918 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Timing reference Defines the timing reference. Source ← Timing reference Selects the waveform that is used to obtain the timing information required to slice the data source waveform. If you perform eye diagram analysis on the DDR serial protocol, select the serial bus here.
  • Page 919 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) "Bit rate" Nominal frequency or bit rate of the data signal. "Range UI" Number of unit intervals that are visible in the eye diagram. "Position UI" Place of the zero point in the diagram, in unit intervals. The zero point is the alignment point on which the segment timestamps are superim- posed.
  • Page 920 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Persistence Each eye diagram has its specific persistence settings, independent of the general waveform persistence. For a description of the persistence settings, see Chapter 4.4, "Display settings", on page 112. Slices per acquisition Sets the number of waveform slices for a single acquisition.
  • Page 921 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel (vertical subtabs E1 to E4). Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the left before you adjust the settings. Gate Restricts the contributing slices in horizontal direction.
  • Page 922 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) on page 2190 EYE<m>:QUALify:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 2190 EYE<m>:QUALify:GATE:CURSor on page 2191 EYE<m>:QUALify:GATE:ZDIagram Signal Sets a waveform-based qualification for the eye generation. The voltage level of a waveform is compared with a threshold, and only if this condition is fulfilled, the slices contribute to the eye generation.
  • Page 923 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel (vertical subtabs E1 to E4). Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the left before you adjust the settings. Enable filter Applies the filter settings.
  • Page 924 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Remote command: on page 2193 EYE<m>:FILTer:BPATtern:PREFix<1..8> on page 2193 EYE<m>:FILTer:BPATtern:CENTer on page 2193 EYE<m>:FILTer:BPATtern:SUFFix<1..5> Pattern control Shift the pattern bit by bit to the left or to the right, and reset to the default (X for all bits).
  • Page 925 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 13.23.4.3 Measurements and zoom on eye diagrams To analyze eye diagrams, you can use the following basic functions of the R&S RTP: ● Cursor measurements Cursors can be used on eye diagrams in the usual way. "Track waveform" is not supported.

  • Page 926: Mixed Signal Option (Mso, R&S Rtp-B1)

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 14 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTP-B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical oscilloscope functions. Using the MSO option, you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and correlated digital sig- nals simultaneously.
  • Page 927 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Enable bus Enables the selected parallel bus. The corresponding signal icon appears on the signal bar. If another active bus already uses the same digital channel, the instrument disables the other bus and shows a message.
  • Page 928 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Threshold Hysteresis Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 By default, same threshold and hysteresis value are used for all digital channels and all parallel buses: "Couple thresholds" is enabled. You can also set different thresholds for the individual channel groups.
  • Page 929 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Remote command: on page 2202 (all buses) BUS<m>:PARallel:THCoupling on page 2198 (bus1) DIGital<m>:THCoupling Hysteresis ← Advanced Defines the size of the hysteresis for the respective channels. "Normal" The instrument sets a small value suitable for the signal and its set- tings.
  • Page 930 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Show bus If enabled, the resulting bus signal and bus values are displayed in the diagram. Select the presentation type for the bus signal with "Bus display" on page 930.
  • Page 931 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Clock source ← Clocked bus Selects the digital channel used as clock. Remote command: on page 2205 BUS<m>:PARallel:CLOCk Clock slope ← Clocked bus Selects the slope of the clock signal at which all digital channels of the bus are ana- lyzed.

  • Page 932: Parallel Buses - Digital Probes

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Global skew Sets a general delay for all digital channels. The resulting skew of a digital channel is the sum of the general "Global skew" and the individual "Skew". Remote command: on page 2203 BUS<m>:PARallel:DESoffset...

  • Page 933: Digital Resolution

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 14.1.3 Digital resolution Access: "Menu" > "Acquire" If an MSO option is installed and at least one digital channel is active, additional infor- mation appears on the "Setup" tab of the "Acquire" dialog box. Dig.

  • Page 934: Using Digital Probes

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 14.1.4 Using digital probes Ensuring accurate measurement results The mixed-signal-option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) with connected probe leads is consid- ered as a test probe, according to EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101. Therefore, the measurements are sensitive to electromagnetic interference.

  • Page 935: Setting The Logical Thresholds

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display The digital signals are shown in the diagram, and the signal icon of the parallel bus appears on the signal bar. Using this bus icon, you can minimize, arrange, and switch off the bus together with its channels in the same way as you do with any waveform.

  • Page 936: Parallel Bus - Decode Table

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display You can also drag the bus waveforms on the display and scale them. ● Show the result box of the decoded clocked bus signal Each parallel bus is shown in a separate diagram, and the diagrams can be minimized and arranged as usual.

  • Page 937: Adjusting The Display Of Digital Channels And Parallel Buses

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger The results can be saved to a .csv or .html file, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Results", on page 495. 14.2.2 Adjusting the display of digital channels and parallel buses The display of digital channels and parallel buses is flexible, you can adjust it to your needs by combining the following settings: 1.

  • Page 938: Trigger Settings For Digital Signals And Parallel Buses

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Table 14-1: Trigger types and digital trigger sources Trigger type Trigger source is Digital channel Logic combination of Parallel bus digital channels Edge Width Timeout Setup & Hold State Pattern (with holdoff) Serial Pattern In firmware versions <...
  • Page 939 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Source If the Mixed Signal Option is installed, the variety of trigger sources is enhanced with specific digital trigger sources. As a trigger source you can select: ● One of the digital channels "D0" ... "D15" ●...
  • Page 940 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 14-1: Edge trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels (Logic) Slope Defines the edge - the state transition - of the signal. "Positive" Means a 0 to 1 transition of the state. "Negative"...
  • Page 941 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 14-2: Width trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels Polarity Sets the polarity of a pulse to "Positive", "Negative", or "Both". When triggering on a positive pulse, the trigger event occurs on the high to low transi- tion of the pulse if the timing condition is true.
  • Page 942 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Width For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width, respectively. For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta".
  • Page 943 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger "Stays high" The level of a digital channel stays above the threshold, or the logical expression for "Logic" trigger source is true. "Stays low" The level of a digital channel stays below the threshold, or the logical expression for "Logic"...
  • Page 944 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 14-4: Setup & Hold trigger settings Clock source Selects the digital channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SETHold:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:CSOurce:VALue on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal.
  • Page 945 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 2213 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SETHold:HTIMe 14.3.1.6 State The state trigger detects the logical state of several logically combined digital channels at a given clock edge. The trigger source is a logical combination of digital channels or a parallel bus.
  • Page 946 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 2214 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:BIT<0..15> Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine]...
  • Page 947 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine] on page 2210 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:EXPRession[:DEFine]...
  • Page 948 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Width settings The width settings "Range", "Width" and "±Delta" appear if the timing mode is set to "Width". Range ← Width settings Selects how the range of a pulse width is defined: Triggers when the pattern comes false inside a given time range.
  • Page 949 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 14-7: Serial pattern trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal. The bit value is determined at the crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold.

  • Page 950: Triggering On Digital Signals And Parallel Buses

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Measurements on digital channels Remote command: on page 2217 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SPATtern:PATTern 14.3.2 Triggering on digital signals and parallel buses For a detailed description of the settings, see Chapter 14.3.1, "Trigger settings for digi- tal signals and parallel buses", on page 938.

  • Page 951: Data Export

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Data export These are: ● Period ● Frequency ● Positive and negative pulse ● Pulse count ● Delay ● Phase ● Positive and negative duty cycle ● Burst width ● Edge count Except for delay measurement, the measurements have the same settings and results for analog and digital sources.

  • Page 952: Mathematics

    ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Search See also: ● Chapter 12.2.6, "Saving and loading waveform data", on page 500 ● Chapter 12.2.1, "Waveform export files", on page 481 Remote commands for export to file: ● on page 1527 EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce ●...
  • Page 953 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Search You can search for edge, width, timeout, and Setup & Hold conditions. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 954: Waveform Generator (Option R&S Rtp-B6)

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator 15 Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) The R&S RTP includes an integrated waveform generator which can generate input signals and patterns during testing. You can setup and output two waveform genera- tors and a pattern generator.

  • Page 955: General Settings

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Make sure that the tab of the correct waveform generator is selected on the left side. The settings of the waveform generators are not affected by an instrument preset. Press "Preset Gen1/2"...

  • Page 956: Function Generator

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator ● Chapter 15.1.2, "Function generator", on page 956 ● Chapter 15.1.3, "Modulation", on page 961 ● Chapter 15.1.4, "Sweep", on page 967 ● Chapter 15.1.5, "Arbitrary", on page 968 Remote command: on page 2220 WGENerator<m>:SOURce...
  • Page 957 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Square" Generates a square wave. You can set its Frequency, Period Duty cycle. "Ramp" Generates a ramp signal. You can set its Frequency, Period Symmetry. "DC" Generates a direct current (DC) signal. You can set the "Absolute level"...
  • Page 958 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Pulse" Generates a pulse signal. You can set the Frequency, Period Pulse width. "Cardinal sine" Generates a cardinal sine wave. You can set the Frequency Period. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 959 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Cardiac" Generates a cardiac signal. You can set the Frequency and Period. "Gauss" Generates a gauss signal . You can set the Frequency and Period. "Lorentz" Generates a Lorentz signal . You can set the Frequency and Period.
  • Page 960 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Exp. rise" Generates an exponential rise signal. You can set the Frequency Period. "Exp. fall" Generates an exponential fall signal. You can set the Frequency Period. Remote command: on page 2221 WGENerator<m>:FUNCtion[:SELect] Frequency...

  • Page 961: Modulation

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Function type" Min frequency Max frequency "Pulse" 0.001 Hz 30 MHz "Cardinal sine" 0.001 Hz 5 MHz "Cardiac" 0.001 Hz 1 MHz "Gauss" 0.001 Hz 25 MHz "Lorentz" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Exp.rise"...
  • Page 962 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator 15.1.3.1 General settings Consists of settings for selecting the modulation type. Modulation type Selects the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified. "AM" Amplitude modulation. See: Chapter 15.1.3.2, "AM modulation",...
  • Page 963 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Carrier period Sets the period of the carrier signal. Remote command: on page 2225 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:CARRier:PERiod 15.1.3.2 AM modulation For amplitude modulation (AM), the amplitude of the carrier signal is varied according to the modulation signal.
  • Page 964 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 2224 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:AM:DEPTh Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform, the percentage of time that the waveform is rising. Remote command: on page 2224 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:AM:SYMMetry Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform.
  • Page 965 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 2228 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM[:FUNCtion] Modulation freq Sets the frequency of the modulation waveform. Remote command: on page 2228 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM:FREQuency Modulation depth Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the pulse width range that is used for the modulation.
  • Page 966 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the FM modulation types. Remote command: on page 2226 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM[:FUNCtion] Modulation freq Sets the frequency of the modulation waveform. Remote command: on page 2226 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM:FREQuency...

  • Page 967: Sweep

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform. The duty cycle expresses the percentage of the period during which the waveform is active, i.e. the signal state is high. Remote command: on page 2225 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM:DCYCle...

  • Page 968: Arbitrary

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Start frequency Sets the start frequency of the sweep signal. Remote command: on page 2229 WGENerator<m>:SWEep:FSTart Stop freuqency Sets the stop frequency of the sweep signal. Remote command: on page 2229 WGENerator<m>:SWEep[:FEND] Sweep time...
  • Page 969 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Gen format (see Content and format of the R&S wave gen *.csv files), Tektronix AFG format or Keysight WaveGen format. Content and format of the R&S wave gen *.csv files The R&S waveform generator format can contain the following values: ●...
  • Page 970 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Content and format of the R&S arbitrary generator *.bin files The file stream should contain the following information in the given order: ● Sample rate [double format] ● Number of samples [unsigned integer format] ●...
  • Page 971 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Sample rate Sets the sample rate for the arbitrary waveform. Remote command: on page 2232 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:SRATe Samples Displays the number of samples in the loaded waveform. Remote command: on page 2232 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:SAMPles? Run single...
  • Page 972 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Select waveform When a multichannel file is loaded into the arbitrary waveform generator, a dialog appears to select which waveform from the file is loaded. Select the waveform and press "Load" to load it into the arbitrary waveform generator. Remote command: on page 2230 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:MULTichannel:NAME...

  • Page 973: Setup Of The Pattern Generator

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator 15.2 Setup of the pattern generator The pattern generator outputs parallel patterns. Using pattern generator accessories The pattern generator with connected Patt Gen Cable and Patt Gen Board (1329.7054.02) is considered as a test probe, EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101, note 1.

  • Page 974: Content And Format Of The Pattern Generator Files

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator 15.2.1 Content and format of the pattern generator files The pattern generator supports .bin or .csv file formats. Content and format of the R&S*.csv files The file's header have the following structure: ●...

  • Page 975: Pattern Generator Settings

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator The file stream should contain the following information in the given order: ● Bit rate [double] ● High level [double] ● Mask [string of 8 characters made up of "X"/"1"/"0"] ●...

  • Page 976: Output

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Output Preset Gen1/Gen2/Patt Gen Sets the parameters of the generator to their default values. The settings of the gener- ators are not affected by an instrument preset.They are also not stored in the user- defined preset.

  • Page 977: Noise

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Output Amplitude Sets the amplitude, peak to peak voltage, of the output waveform. It is defined as the voltage difference between the maximum ("High") and the minimum ("Low") voltage levels. The "Amplitude" value is set for the currently selected "User Load". If the "User Load" is changed, the value of "Amplitude"...

  • Page 978: Dc Offset Alignment

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Output Remote command: on page 2237 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:NOISe Relative level Sets the level of the noise in percentage of the set "Amplitude" output of the signal. Remote command: on page 2237 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:NLPCent Absolute level Displays the level of the noise in volts.

  • Page 979: Coupling Settings

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Coupling settings Remote command: on page 2238 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC:RESult:DATE? Time Displays the time of the last performed DC offset alignment. Remote command: on page 2238 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC:RESult:TIME? Overall alignment state Displays the result of the DC offset alignment. Remote command: on page 2238 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC:RESult[:STATe]?

  • Page 980: Sync Settings

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Sync settings Amplitude parameters Couples all amplitude parameters of "Gen1" to "Gen2" or "Gen2" to "Gen1" including the load. The values are taken from the currently selected generator. ● For all "Operation Mode": the output settings except of "Load" and "Inversion", "Amplitude", "High", "Offset"...

  • Page 981: Configuring The Waveform Generator

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator Sync start Selects, which signals generated from the waveform generator are synchronized. Selecting one of the sync options indicates that the first samples of those signals are generated at the same time, irrespective of if the generators are on or off. Selecting one of the coupling options automatically syncs the signals generated by the two wave- form generators.

  • Page 982: Configuring A Modulation Waveform

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator 7. Press the "Enable" button, to output the waveform at the output connector of the waveform generator. 15.6.2 Configuring a modulation waveform Generating an AM modulated waveform 1. Open "Menu" > "Apps" > "Generators" > "Gen1". 2.

  • Page 983: Configuring A Sweep Waveform

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator 4. Tap "Modulation type" and select "FM". 5. Set the "Carrier frequency" and the "Carrier period". 6. Tap "Modulation signal" and select the required waveform. 7. Depending on the selected "Modulation signal", configure the settings of the wave- form like "Modulation freq"...

  • Page 984: Configuring A Pattern Generator Waveform

    ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator 3. Under "Operation mode", enable the "Arbitrary" button. 4. Set the "Arb wfm source" to "Saved waveform". 5. Select the "Run mode". 6. Press "Open" and set the path to your saved arbitrary waveform. 7.

  • Page 985: Pulse Source And Tdr/Tdt Analysis (Option R&S Rtp-B7/K130)

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S Pulse source (option R&S RTP-B7) 16 Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) 16.1 Pulse source (option R&S RTP-B7) The pulse source option R&S RTP-B7 provides a symmetrical differential pulse signal with steep rise time and configurable parameters.

  • Page 986: Settings For The Pulse Source

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S Pulse source (option R&S RTP-B7) Typical applications of the pulse source are: ● Stimulus for devices under test, for example, as a precise clock ● Accurate source for deskewing cables and probes for differential measurements ●...
  • Page 987 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S Pulse source (option R&S RTP-B7) Enable Switches all four pulse source outputs on and off. Remote command: on page 2241 PSRC[:STAT] Output level Sets the low level of the output pulse. The high level is 0 V and cannot be changed. Remote command: on page 2241 PSRC:OUTPutlow...

  • Page 988: Tdr/Tdt Analysis (Option R&S Rtp-K130)

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Clock mode Sets the dependency of the pulse clock on the instrument's reference clock. The appropriate clock mode depends on the measurement application. "Free running" The clock of the pulse source is independent.
  • Page 989 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Requirements TDR/TDT analysis requires the pulse source option R&S RTP-B7. Cabling requirements: ● Use only high-quality double-shielded RF cables. Two suitable cables are delivered with the pulse source option R&S RTP-B7. ●...

  • Page 990: Using Tdr/Tdt

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) 16.2.2 Using TDR/TDT 16.2.2.1 Calibrating the setup Before you can start TDR/TDT measurements, calibrate the used cables. You can: ● Calibrate the setup using the calibration wizard of the R&S RTP. ●...
  • Page 991 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) a) Remove the short. b) Select "Calibrate". 9. Calibrate with a match: a) Connect a match to the cable that is connected to the "Out" connector. b) Select "Calibrate".

  • Page 992: Calibration Settings

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) 4. Connect the DUT instead of calibration standards as shown in the dialog. 5. Under "Signals", select the characteristics that you want to analyze. 6. Enter the "Bandwidth" of the DUT. 7.
  • Page 993 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Remote command: on page 2244 TDRT:TYPE Configuration Selects the connection: "single-ended" or "differential" measurement. Remote command: on page 2244 TDRT:CONFig Calibrate setup Starts the wizard for manual calibration. In the next steps, you connect several calibra- tion standards and measure the correction parameters.
  • Page 994 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Figure 16-2: Channel setup for single-ended TDR/TDT User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 995 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Figure 16-3: Channel setup for differential TDR/TDT Channel Select the input channels that are connected to the "Ref" connector and the "Out" con- nector of the pulse source. For differential measurements, connect also Note: The position of the DUT is shown for information only.
  • Page 996 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Figure 16-4: Calibration of single-ended TDR/TDT User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 12...

  • Page 997: Calibration Results

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Figure 16-5: Calibration of differential TDR/TDT The used short type is shown in the wizard. To change the short, tap the "Edit" icon. Short type Selects whether the short is the Rohde &...
  • Page 998 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Magnitude response plot Shows the graph of magnitude over frequency for the short calibration (TDR) and through calibration (TDT). Figure 16-6: Result of TDR and TDT calibration: smooth graph with moderate attenuation User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...

  • Page 999: Measurement Settings

    ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Figure 16-7: Result of TDR calibration: high attenuation and noisy graph at higher frequencies Save calibration Saves the current correction values to a file. Using the saved file, you can repeat the measurements at any time.
  • Page 1000 ® Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-B7/K130) R&S TDR/TDT analysis (option R&S RTP-K130) Enable Activates the TDR/TDT measurements. Use frequency response calibration Disables the frequency response calibration. Without calibration, the measured signals are only rescaled, and you can see the impact of the frequency response calibration on the time domain waveform.

This manual is also suitable for:

Rtp064Rtp084Rtp134Rtp1641320.5007k041320.5007k06 ... Show all

Table of Contents